1 #LyX 2.5 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
172 by the \SpecialChar LyX
177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
179 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
180 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
181 Documentation mailing list:
183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Note Note
208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
209 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
223 \begin_layout Standard
224 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
225 LatexCommand tableofcontents
232 \begin_layout Chapter
236 \begin_layout Section
237 What is \SpecialChar LyX
241 \begin_layout Standard
243 is a document preparation system.
244 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
247 business letters and proposals,
249 It is unlike most other
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
258 That means that when you type a section header,
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
289 takes care of the typesetting for you;
290 so you deal only with concepts,
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
300 If you haven't read it yet,
306 \begin_layout Standard
311 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
314 the format of all of the manuals.
315 If you don't read it,
316 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
317 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
320 \begin_layout Section
325 \begin_layout Standard
326 Like most applications,
328 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
329 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
330 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
333 \begin_layout Standard
334 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
335 This is not a bug or an oversight,
337 When you read a book,
338 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
339 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
340 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
345 The first case is large images.
346 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
347 left click on the image and use the option
358 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
365 menus and toolbar buttons,
366 have a look at Appendix
371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
373 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
381 \begin_layout Section
385 \begin_layout Standard
386 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
388 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
390 Just select the manual you want to read from the
397 \begin_layout Section
398 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
402 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
411 can be configured via the menu
413 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
417 \begin_inset Index idx
422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
432 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 packages are available.
434 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
435 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
436 was installed on your system,
437 you might have some items that you installed locally,
439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
443 \begin_inset space \space{}
446 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
448 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
450 To force \SpecialChar LyX
451 to re-inspect your system use
453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
457 \begin_inset Index idx
462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
469 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
470 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
473 \begin_layout Section
476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
478 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
485 \begin_layout Standard
486 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
487 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs.
489 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 every \SpecialChar LyX
491 document can still be output as plain text,
492 as Docbook or as XHTML.
495 \begin_layout Standard
496 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
498 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
499 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
502 \begin_layout Standard
503 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
504 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
505 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
507 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
515 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
522 \begin_inset Index idx
527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
528 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
536 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
543 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
547 \begin_layout Chapter
548 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
552 \begin_layout Section
553 Basic File Operations
554 \begin_inset Index idx
559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
568 \begin_layout Standard
573 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
576 \begin_layout Itemize
599 \begin_layout Itemize
616 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
622 \begin_layout Itemize
645 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
665 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
686 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Itemize
722 arg "buffer-write-as"
728 \begin_layout Itemize
742 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Itemize
762 \begin_layout Itemize
777 \begin_layout Standard
778 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
779 with a few minor differences.
782 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
793 command lists the available templates.
794 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features and possibly propose text fragments for the document,
795 features and text you would otherwise need to set or enter manually.
796 They can be of use for certain classes,
797 especially those for writing letters (see section
802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
804 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
810 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
819 \begin_layout Standard
820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
854 to open a file or create a new one,
855 that big blank space on the screen is just that —
864 \begin_layout Standard
885 are useful if multiple people work on the same document at the same time.
889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
890 If you plan to do this,
891 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
894 \begin_inset Flex Emph
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
898 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
905 \begin_inset Flex Emph
908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
914 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
932 will reload the document from disk.
933 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last saved version.
942 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
945 \begin_layout Section
946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
948 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
953 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
956 \begin_layout Standard
958 lays much stress on safety.
959 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
960 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
962 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
964 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
965 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
966 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
969 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
970 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
971 does not simply make a backup file,
972 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
973 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
974 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
981 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
986 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
989 \begin_layout Standard
991 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
994 \begin_layout Subsection
998 \begin_layout Standard
1001 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1003 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1017 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1022 in preferences (see section
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1029 reference "sec:Paths"
1038 then all backups are stored there.
1039 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1040 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1041 but also the path in their name,
1043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1057 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1062 \begin_layout Standard
1063 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1064 and you need to enable
1065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1072 in order to see them.
1075 \begin_layout Standard
1076 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1077 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1079 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1082 \begin_layout Subsection
1086 \begin_layout Standard
1089 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1091 \begin_inset space ~
1095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1097 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1102 As opposed to the backup files,
1103 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1106 \begin_layout Standard
1107 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1126 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1132 with all changes saved.
1133 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1138 program crash or power outage),
1139 and this is when they might become useful.
1142 \begin_layout Subsection
1146 \begin_layout Standard
1148 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1149 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1150 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1151 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1155 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1166 myfile.lyx.emergency
1169 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1171 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1174 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1175 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1178 \begin_layout Subsection
1179 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1183 \begin_layout Standard
1184 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1185 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1187 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1190 keeps a copy of the old version,
1193 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1196 where <n> is the old format (e.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1203 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1206 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1207 that is alongside the original document or,
1209 in the backup directory.
1212 \begin_layout Standard
1213 As with backup files,
1214 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1218 \begin_layout Subsection
1219 When to Use Which File?
1222 \begin_layout Standard
1223 Now why all these files?
1224 Because they have different purposes.
1228 \begin_layout Standard
1230 terminates unexpectedly,
1233 \begin_layout Enumerate
1234 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1236 This file has the latest changes,
1237 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1240 \begin_layout Enumerate
1241 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1246 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1248 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1250 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1251 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1253 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1256 \begin_layout Enumerate
1257 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1258 use the backup file.
1259 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1260 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1261 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1264 \begin_layout Standard
1265 The fourth type of file,
1266 the backup file from old versions,
1267 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1270 \begin_layout Standard
1271 So much for the safety net.
1272 We hope you will not need it,
1274 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1275 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1278 \begin_layout Section
1279 Basic Editing Features
1280 \begin_inset Index idx
1285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1294 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1301 \begin_layout Standard
1302 Like most modern word processors,
1304 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1305 can move by character,
1308 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1309 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1310 editing features and how to access them.
1311 We will start with cut and paste.
1314 \begin_layout Standard
1315 As you might expect,
1320 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1321 along with various other editing features.
1322 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1326 \begin_layout Itemize
1332 \begin_inset Index idx
1337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1367 \begin_layout Itemize
1373 \begin_inset Index idx
1378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1408 \begin_layout Itemize
1414 \begin_inset Index idx
1419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1445 \begin_layout Itemize
1449 \begin_inset space ~
1455 \begin_layout Itemize
1459 \begin_inset space ~
1465 \begin_layout Itemize
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1473 \begin_inset space ~
1479 \begin_inset Index idx
1484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1493 \begin_inset Index idx
1498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1514 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1524 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 The first three are self-explanatory.
1532 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1533 and other programs using
1555 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1560 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1561 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1562 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1563 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1567 \begin_inset space ~
1572 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1573 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1580 \begin_inset space ~
1585 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1586 Possible formats include HTML,
1591 \begin_inset space ~
1598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1607 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1613 \begin_inset space \space{}
1616 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1619 \begin_layout Standard
1623 \begin_inset space ~
1626 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_inset space ~
1632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1636 \begin_inset space ~
1645 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1646 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1647 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1651 \begin_inset space ~
1657 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1658 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1666 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1672 \begin_inset space ~
1680 \begin_inset space ~
1683 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1686 paste from the primary selection.
1687 This is normally the currently selected text.
1690 \begin_layout Standard
1693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 \begin_inset space ~
1699 \begin_inset space ~
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1717 Once you have found a word or expression,
1723 \begin_inset space ~
1738 shortcut) to skip the currently selected word,
1742 \begin_inset space ~
1754 arg "word-find-backward"
1757 shortcut) to search backwards.
1758 Even if you close the widget,
1768 arg "word-find-backward"
1771 will search further.
1774 \begin_layout Standard
1779 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1787 field and searches the next match.
1791 \begin_inset space ~
1796 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1801 the following options are available:
1804 \begin_layout Itemize
1809 \begin_inset space ~
1814 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1815 If the toggle is set,
1817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 will not match the word
1829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1844 \begin_layout Itemize
1850 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1851 to only find complete words,
1853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1885 \begin_layout Itemize
1891 will limit search and replace,
1893 to the current cursor selection.
1896 \begin_layout Itemize
1902 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1903 without pressing the
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1914 \begin_layout Itemize
1919 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1920 If this is not checked,
1921 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1922 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1923 so you need to put it back manually.
1926 \begin_layout Standard
1927 \paragraph_spacing single
1928 The widget also has a
1932 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1933 hiding replace and options.
1939 button brings you back to the full size.
1942 \begin_layout Standard
1943 \paragraph_spacing single
1946 also offers an advanced
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1953 \begin_inset space ~
1958 feature that is described in section
1959 \begin_inset space ~
1963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1965 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1973 \begin_layout Standard
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1989 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1990 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1994 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2001 \begin_layout Standard
2005 arg "inset-select-all"
2008 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2009 When the cursor is inside an inset
2012 arg "inset-select-all"
2015 selects the content of the inset.
2019 arg "inset-select-all"
2022 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2026 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2029 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2032 \begin_layout Section
2034 \begin_inset Index idx
2039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2046 \begin_inset Index idx
2051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2060 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2068 If you make a mistake,
2069 you can easily recover from it.
2071 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2077 or the toolbar button
2084 If you accidentally undo too much,
2087 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2090 or the toolbar button
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2104 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2108 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2111 \begin_layout Standard
2120 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2122 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2123 but by blocks of text.
2126 \begin_layout Section
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2142 \begin_layout Standard
2143 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2146 \begin_layout Enumerate
2151 \begin_layout Itemize
2156 once anywhere in the edit window.
2157 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2161 \begin_layout Enumerate
2166 \begin_layout Itemize
2173 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2176 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2179 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2180 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2181 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2184 \begin_layout Itemize
2185 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2188 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2195 \begin_layout Enumerate
2203 \begin_layout Standard
2204 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2205 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2209 \begin_layout Section
2211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2213 name "sec:Navigating"
2218 \begin_inset Index idx
2223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2232 \begin_layout Standard
2234 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2237 \begin_layout Itemize
2242 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2245 \begin_layout Itemize
2247 which is accessed either by the menu
2249 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2251 \begin_inset space ~
2256 or by the toolbar button
2259 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2265 \begin_layout Itemize
2266 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2268 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2271 and use the same menu to return to them.
2272 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2275 \begin_layout Standard
2279 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2284 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2285 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2287 \begin_inset space ~
2292 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2293 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2296 \begin_layout Standard
2301 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2305 \begin_layout Subsection
2307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2309 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2314 \begin_inset Index idx
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2321 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2336 \begin_inset Index idx
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Standard
2351 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2353 labels and cross-references (see section
2354 \begin_inset space ~
2358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2360 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2367 or citations (see section
2368 \begin_inset space ~
2372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2374 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2380 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2383 \begin_layout Standard
2384 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2385 For example with citations,
2386 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2389 \begin_layout Standard
2394 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2396 if you are displaying the list of
2398 Labels and References
2400 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2401 you can enter the text
2402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2409 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2413 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2418 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2419 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2424 option keeps it in the current view state.
2425 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2429 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2430 \begin_inset space ~
2434 the subsections of sections
2435 \begin_inset space ~
2438 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2443 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2444 \begin_inset space ~
2449 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2458 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2461 \begin_layout Standard
2468 button refreshes the TOC (useful while editing if you have changed sections in the document).
2469 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2482 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2484 you can move section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset space ~
2492 2.4 or after section
2493 \begin_inset space ~
2498 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2511 (or the corresponding key bindings
2519 ) you can change the level of sections.
2520 You can make section
2521 \begin_inset space ~
2525 \begin_inset space ~
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2535 \begin_layout Standard
2536 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2540 \begin_layout Subsection
2541 Horizontal Scrolling
2542 \begin_inset Index idx
2547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2576 \begin_layout Standard
2578 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2579 \begin_inset space ~
2582 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2583 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2588 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2592 \begin_layout Itemize
2594 is used on a small tablet computer
2597 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2610 \begin_inset space ~
2623 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 Math constructs with long command names
2627 \begin_layout Standard
2628 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2629 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2630 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2631 window so that table
2632 \begin_inset space ~
2636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2638 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2644 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2645 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2648 \begin_layout Standard
2649 \begin_inset Float table
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2657 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2662 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2666 Horizontal scrolling test.
2674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2676 \begin_inset Tabular
2677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2723 \begin_layout Section
2724 Input/Word Completion
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2727 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2732 \begin_inset Index idx
2737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2744 \begin_inset Index idx
2749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2782 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2783 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2786 \begin_layout Standard
2787 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2790 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2795 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2802 \begin_inset space ~
2806 \begin_inset space ~
2811 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2815 \begin_inset space ~
2820 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2821 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2824 \begin_inset space ~
2830 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2831 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2834 \begin_layout Standard
2836 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2841 key to accept a proposed completion.
2842 If several completions are possible,
2843 a popup is opened showing them.
2844 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2851 \begin_layout Standard
2852 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2854 the special math option
2858 enables characters to be composed.
2860 if you want to insert the character
2861 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2865 you can input the characters
2866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2877 in a formula to create it.
2878 This is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2879 A list of supported character combinations can be found in the file
2883 located in \SpecialChar LyX
2884 's installation folder.
2889 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2890 In the example above,
2896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2927 \begin_layout Section
2929 \begin_inset Index idx
2934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2941 \begin_inset Index idx
2946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2948 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2963 \begin_inset Index idx
2968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2970 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 \begin_layout Standard
2988 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3004 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3007 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3011 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3012 \begin_inset space ~
3016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3018 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3026 \begin_layout Standard
3031 \begin_inset space ~
3040 \begin_inset space ~
3065 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3069 \begin_layout Labeling
3070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3074 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3075 LatexCommand nomenclature
3077 description "Tabulator key"
3084 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3086 If you do not understand this,
3088 \begin_inset space ~
3092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3094 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3102 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3109 \begin_inset space ~
3113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3115 reference "subsec:Lists"
3124 If you are still confused,
3130 \begin_inset Newline newline
3138 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3139 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3142 \begin_layout Labeling
3143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3147 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3148 LatexCommand nomenclature
3150 description "Escape key"
3158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3167 to cancel operations.
3168 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3171 \begin_layout Labeling
3172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3177 These move the cursor,
3179 to the beginning and end of a line,
3180 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 There are three modifier keys:
3187 \begin_layout Labeling
3188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3206 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3207 LatexCommand nomenclature
3209 description "Control key"
3214 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3218 \begin_layout Itemize
3228 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3231 \begin_layout Itemize
3241 it moves by words instead of characters.
3244 \begin_layout Itemize
3254 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3259 \begin_layout Labeling
3260 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3278 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3279 LatexCommand nomenclature
3281 description "Shift key"
3286 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3289 \begin_layout Labeling
3290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3308 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3309 LatexCommand nomenclature
3311 description "Alt or Meta key"
3316 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3317 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3318 If you have both keys,
3319 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3324 \begin_inset Newline newline
3327 This key does many different things,
3328 but it also activates the
3330 menu accelerator keys
3333 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3334 it selects that menu item.
3338 \begin_layout Standard
3341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset space ~
3351 \begin_inset space ~
3357 \begin_inset space ~
3365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3384 \begin_inset space ~
3390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3400 \begin_layout Standard
3405 manual lists all other things bound to the
3413 \begin_layout Standard
3414 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3415 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3416 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3418 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3419 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3420 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3437 followed by a capital
3444 \begin_layout Chapter
3447 \begin_inset Index idx
3452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 \begin_layout Section
3474 \begin_inset Index idx
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3481 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 \begin_layout Subsection
3502 \begin_layout Standard
3503 Before you do anything else,
3504 before you ever start writing a document,
3505 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3506 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3511 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3512 and format the title of your document differently.
3515 \begin_layout Standard
3520 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3521 By setting the document class,
3522 you automatically select these properties,
3523 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3524 If you don't choose a document class,
3526 picks one for you by default.
3527 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3530 \begin_layout Subsection
3532 \begin_inset Index idx
3537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3556 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3563 \begin_layout Standard
3564 You can select a class using the
3566 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3567 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3571 \begin_inset Index idx
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3578 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3593 Select the class you want to use,
3594 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3601 \begin_layout Standard
3602 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3607 \begin_layout Description
3608 Article for basic articles
3611 \begin_layout Description
3612 Report for basic reports
3615 \begin_layout Description
3616 Book for writing a book
3619 \begin_layout Description
3620 Letter for US-style letters
3623 \begin_layout Standard
3624 There are also some non-standard classes,
3625 which \SpecialChar LyX
3626 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3628 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3629 distributions will include many of these.
3630 Here are some of the classes.
3631 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3633 Special Document Classes
3642 \begin_layout Description
3643 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3646 \begin_layout Description
3647 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3650 \begin_layout Description
3651 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3654 \begin_layout Description
3655 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3656 There are three article layouts available.
3657 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3658 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3659 All result-type statements (propositions,
3661 and so on) are sequenced together,
3664 and the like have their own sequence.
3666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3669 sequential numbering
3670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3673 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3674 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3675 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3676 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3679 \begin_layout Description
3680 Beamer Layout for presentations
3683 \begin_layout Description
3684 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3685 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3687 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3691 \begin_layout Description
3692 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3695 \begin_layout Description
3697 \begin_inset space ~
3700 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3703 \begin_layout Description
3704 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3707 \begin_layout Description
3708 Foils Used to make transparencies
3711 \begin_layout Description
3712 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3713 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3715 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3719 \begin_layout Description
3720 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3723 \begin_layout Description
3724 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3727 \begin_layout Description
3728 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3731 \begin_layout Description
3732 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3733 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3734 automatic print space calculation etc.
3735 (Is used by this document.)
3738 \begin_layout Description
3739 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3742 \begin_layout Description
3743 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3746 \begin_layout Description
3751 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3752 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3753 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3754 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3758 \begin_layout Description
3759 Slides Used to make transparencies
3762 \begin_layout Description
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3767 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3770 \begin_layout Description
3771 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3774 \begin_layout Standard
3775 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3776 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3778 Special Document Classes
3786 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3793 \begin_layout Standard
3794 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3797 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3801 \begin_inset Index idx
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3831 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3832 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3833 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3836 \begin_layout Standard
3839 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3846 are highly specialized.
3848 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3849 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3850 with a growing number.
3851 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3852 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3853 There are just too many of them.
3854 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3857 \begin_layout Standard
3858 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3867 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3868 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3870 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3873 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3880 manual for information on how to install them.
3881 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3887 \begin_layout Standard
3888 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3889 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3890 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3892 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3893 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3894 The \SpecialChar LyX
3895 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3898 users can write their own layout files,
3899 and many users have done so.
3902 Installing New Document Classes,
3910 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3917 name "subsec:Modules"
3922 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3946 \begin_layout Standard
3947 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3948 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3949 This is not available in any document class,
3950 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3960 \begin_inset Index idx
3965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3967 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3982 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3985 \begin_layout Standard
3986 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3987 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3989 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3990 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3991 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3992 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3993 since \SpecialChar LyX
3994 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3995 file without the missing prerequisites.
3996 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3997 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4000 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4004 \begin_inset Index idx
4009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4010 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4029 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4032 \begin_layout Standard
4033 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4042 Some modules require other modules,
4043 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4045 will advise you about these things.
4053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4057 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4062 \begin_inset Index idx
4067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4087 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4088 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4090 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4091 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4092 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4095 a particular document has very special needs,
4096 but you need a specific inset or text style only that one time.
4097 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4099 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4117 manual for information on how to use it.
4120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4124 \begin_layout Standard
4125 Each class has a default set of options.
4126 Here's a quick table describing them:
4129 \begin_layout Standard
4130 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4138 \begin_inset Tabular
4139 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4140 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4599 \begin_layout Standard
4600 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4606 \begin_layout Standard
4607 You're probably also wondering what
4608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4612 \begin_inset space ~
4616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4620 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4621 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4627 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4632 Some document classes,
4633 such as the ones for letters,
4634 don't use any section headings.
4655 We will describe these headings fully in section
4656 \begin_inset space ~
4660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4662 reference "subsec:Headings"
4670 \begin_layout Subsection
4672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4674 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4679 \begin_inset Index idx
4684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4686 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4701 \begin_inset Index idx
4706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4708 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4725 \begin_layout Standard
4726 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4735 \begin_inset space ~
4743 \begin_inset space ~
4749 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4750 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4751 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4752 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4753 -class and its options,
4754 you have to read its manual.
4757 \begin_layout Standard
4761 \begin_inset space ~
4768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4774 \begin_inset space ~
4779 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4780 You can choose between the following five options:
4783 \begin_layout Labeling
4784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4789 Use default page style of current class.
4792 \begin_layout Labeling
4793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4798 No page numbers or headings.
4801 \begin_layout Labeling
4802 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4810 \begin_layout Labeling
4811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4816 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4817 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4818 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4821 \begin_layout Labeling
4822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4827 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4833 \begin_inset Index idx
4838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4856 How they are defined is explained in section
4857 \begin_inset space ~
4861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4863 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4872 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4873 \begin_inset space ~
4877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4879 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4887 \begin_layout Subsection
4888 Paper Size and Orientation
4889 \begin_inset Index idx
4894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4896 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4913 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4920 \begin_layout Standard
4921 You can find the following options in the menu
4924 \begin_inset space ~
4931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4935 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4959 \begin_layout Labeling
4960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4964 \begin_inset space ~
4969 What size paper to print on.
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4980 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Itemize
4992 \begin_layout Itemize
4998 \begin_layout Itemize
5006 \begin_layout Itemize
5012 \begin_layout Itemize
5019 \begin_layout Labeling
5020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5025 To choose whether to output as
5036 \begin_layout Labeling
5037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5041 \begin_inset space ~
5046 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5047 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5050 \begin_layout Subsection
5052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5054 name "subsec:Margins"
5059 \begin_inset Index idx
5064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5081 \begin_inset Index idx
5086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5095 \begin_layout Standard
5096 Paper margins are set in the menu
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 \begin_inset Index idx
5107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5109 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5126 \begin_layout Standard
5127 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5128 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5131 \begin_layout Subsection
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5136 If you change a document class,
5138 has to convert everything into the new class.
5139 That includes the paragraph environments.
5140 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5141 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5142 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5143 If this is the case,
5144 and you change the document class,
5146 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5155 The name of the style is retained,
5156 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5157 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5158 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5161 \begin_layout Section
5162 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5163 \begin_inset Index idx
5168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5187 \begin_layout Subsection
5189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5191 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5198 \begin_layout Standard
5199 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5200 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5203 \begin_layout Standard
5204 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5205 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5206 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5207 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5211 paragraph of a section,
5222 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5223 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5225 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5228 \begin_layout Standard
5229 The space between paragraphs,
5230 like the line spacing,
5231 the space between headings and text —
5233 all the spacing for just about everything —
5234 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5237 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5241 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5244 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5245 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5252 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5253 goes to produce a printable file.
5259 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5261 gives you the ability globally to change
5265 these pre-coded spacings.
5266 We will explain more later.
5269 \begin_layout Subsection
5270 Paragraph Separation
5271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5273 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5278 \begin_inset Index idx
5283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_layout Standard
5310 \begin_inset space ~
5318 \begin_inset space ~
5325 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5329 \begin_inset Index idx
5334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5336 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5350 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5354 \begin_layout Subsection
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5359 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5364 \begin_inset space ~
5369 dialog and toggle the
5372 \begin_inset space ~
5377 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5380 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5384 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5385 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5388 \begin_layout Standard
5389 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5392 \begin_layout Subsection
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5425 \begin_inset Index idx
5430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5432 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5446 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5449 \begin_inset space ~
5458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5459 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5465 \begin_inset Index idx
5470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5473 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5487 installed to use this feature.
5492 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5496 \begin_inset space ~
5501 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5504 \begin_layout Section
5505 Paragraph Environments
5506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5508 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5513 \begin_inset Index idx
5518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5520 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5535 \begin_inset Index idx
5540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5541 Paragraph environments
5549 \begin_layout Subsection
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5557 \begin_layout Standard
5566 } \SpecialChar ldots
5576 \begin_inset Newline newline
5579 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5581 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5583 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5584 we urge you to read the
5593 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5596 \begin_layout Standard
5597 A paragraph environment is simply a
5598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5605 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5606 This can include a particular style of font,
5613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5620 the different environments inside one another,
5621 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5622 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5623 on the fly margin adjustment,
5624 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5625 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5626 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5629 \begin_layout Standard
5630 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5631 use the pull-down box
5632 \begin_inset Graphics
5633 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5639 at the left end of the toolbar.
5641 will change the environment of the
5645 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5646 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5649 \begin_layout Standard
5658 create a new paragraph using the
5662 paragraph environment.
5664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5671 because if you are in one of these environments:
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5686 \begin_layout Itemize
5692 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 \begin_layout Itemize
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5723 rather than resetting it to
5728 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5729 \begin_inset space ~
5733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5735 reference "sec:Nesting"
5743 \begin_layout Subsection
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 The default paragraph environment is
5753 It creates a plain paragraph.
5755 resets the paragraph environment,
5756 this is the one it chooses.
5758 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5765 \begin_layout Standard
5766 You can nest a paragraph using the
5770 environment in just about anything else,
5771 but you can't really nest anything in a
5778 \begin_layout Subsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5804 \begin_layout Standard
5805 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5806 title page has three parts:
5808 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5816 for thanks or contact information.
5817 For certain types of documents,
5819 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5820 For other types of documents,
5822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5829 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5832 \begin_layout Standard
5834 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5849 Here's how you use them:
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 Put the title of your document in the
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5861 Put the author name in the
5868 \begin_layout Itemize
5869 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5870 want to use a fixed date,
5871 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5872 put that text in the
5877 Note that using this environment is optional.
5878 If you don't provide any,
5880 will automatically insert today's date.
5881 If you don't want a date,
5884 Suppress default date on front page
5888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5889 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5891 \begin_inset space ~
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 You can use footnotes to insert
5901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5908 or contact information.
5911 \begin_layout Subsection
5913 \begin_inset Index idx
5918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5927 name "subsec:Headings"
5934 \begin_layout Standard
5935 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5937 takes care of the numbering for you.
5940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5942 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5966 \begin_layout Standard
5967 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5971 \begin_layout Enumerate
5977 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 \begin_layout Enumerate
5989 \begin_layout Enumerate
5995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6001 \begin_layout Enumerate
6007 \begin_layout Enumerate
6013 \begin_layout Standard
6015 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6016 separated by periods.
6017 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6018 Unlike the other headings,
6019 parts are numbered with Roman numerals.
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6023 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6025 suppose you're writing a book.
6026 You group the book into chapters.
6028 does a similar grouping:
6031 \begin_layout Itemize
6036 is divided into either
6047 \begin_layout Itemize
6059 \begin_layout Itemize
6071 \begin_layout Itemize
6083 \begin_layout Itemize
6095 \begin_layout Itemize
6107 \begin_layout Standard
6108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6117 Not all document types use the
6121 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6126 is the top-level heading.
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6140 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6142 labels it with its number,
6143 along with the number of the subsection,
6146 chapter that it's in.
6148 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6161 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6168 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 The unnumbered section headings have a
6187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6194 at the end of their name.
6195 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6197 \begin_inset space ~
6201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6212 Changing the Numbering
6213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6215 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6222 \begin_layout Standard
6223 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6225 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6226 that's preset in the document class.
6227 Just as certain classes start with
6242 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6252 This is something you can change.
6255 \begin_layout Standard
6258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 \begin_inset Index idx
6267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6269 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6295 you will see two counters.
6300 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6301 numbers a section heading.
6302 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6306 Short Titles of Headings
6307 \begin_inset Index idx
6312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6329 \begin_inset Argument 1
6332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6341 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6348 \begin_layout Standard
6349 Some section or chapter titles,
6352 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6354 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6355 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6360 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6361 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6362 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6363 To specify a short title,
6364 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6368 \begin_inset space ~
6374 This will insert a box labeled
6375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6379 \begin_inset space ~
6383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6386 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6387 This also works for captions inside floats.
6388 There can only be one short title per title.
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6392 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6399 \begin_layout Standard
6400 The following information applies to all section headings:
6403 \begin_layout Itemize
6404 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6407 \begin_layout Itemize
6408 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6411 \begin_layout Itemize
6412 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6415 \begin_layout Itemize
6416 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6419 \begin_layout Subsection
6423 \begin_layout Standard
6425 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6444 They also allow nesting,
6454 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6457 \begin_layout Standard
6458 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6467 when you start a new paragraph.
6469 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6473 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6476 once you are done typing in that poem,
6477 you have to change back to the
6481 environment yourself.
6484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6493 \begin_inset Index idx
6498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6508 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6509 it's time for the differences.
6518 are identical except for one difference:
6523 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6532 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Here's an example of the
6550 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6551 See – no indentation!
6555 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6557 there's no indentation,
6558 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6562 Here's another example,
6570 \begin_layout Quotation
6577 you will see the indentation.
6578 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6583 is the environment for you!
6589 you were quoting other text.
6592 \begin_layout Quotation
6593 Here's a new paragraph.
6594 I could ramble on and on,
6595 like a politician at election time.
6601 \begin_layout Standard
6602 As the examples show,
6607 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6608 They should put quotes in the
6613 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6617 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6622 \begin_inset Index idx
6627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6629 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6644 \begin_inset Index idx
6649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6670 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6679 \begin_inset Newline newline
6682 Which I did not rehearse!
6686 It could be much worse.
6687 This line could be long,
6690 so very long that it wraps around.
6691 It looks okay on screen,
6692 but in the printed version,
6693 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6695 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6701 \begin_inset Newline newline
6704 And make things look fine
6705 \begin_inset Newline newline
6711 arg "newline-insert newline"
6717 \begin_layout Standard
6723 does not indent both margins.
6724 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6725 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6729 arg "newline-insert newline"
6735 \begin_layout Subsection
6737 \begin_inset Index idx
6742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6760 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6771 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6783 lets you provide your own label.
6784 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6791 \begin_layout Standard
6792 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6795 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6804 reset the environment to
6808 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6809 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6810 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6814 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6818 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6819 it returns you to the
6826 \begin_layout Standard
6827 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6830 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6831 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6832 we suggest you read all of section
6833 \begin_inset space ~
6837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6839 reference "sec:Nesting"
6847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6849 \begin_inset Index idx
6854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6880 \begin_layout Standard
6881 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6885 paragraph environment.
6886 It has the following properties:
6889 \begin_layout Itemize
6890 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6894 \begin_layout Itemize
6896 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6899 \begin_layout Itemize
6900 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6904 \begin_layout Itemize
6905 The items can have any length.
6907 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6908 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6915 \begin_layout Itemize
6920 environment inside another
6925 the label changes to a new symbol.
6929 \begin_layout Itemize
6930 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6933 \begin_layout Itemize
6935 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6938 \begin_layout Itemize
6940 \begin_inset space ~
6944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6946 reference "sec:Nesting"
6951 for a full explanation of nesting.
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6957 that explanation was also an example of an
6966 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6970 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6971 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6974 \begin_layout Itemize
6975 The label for the first level
6979 is a large black dot,
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6985 The label for the second level is a dash.
6989 \begin_layout Itemize
6990 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6994 \begin_layout Itemize
6995 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6999 \begin_layout Itemize
7000 Back out to the third level.
7004 \begin_layout Itemize
7005 Back to the second level.
7009 \begin_layout Itemize
7010 Back to the outermost level.
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7014 These are the default labels for an
7019 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7024 dialog in the submenu
7029 \begin_inset Index idx
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7036 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7050 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7056 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7057 \begin_inset space ~
7061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7063 reference "sec:Nesting"
7071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7073 \begin_inset Index idx
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7097 name "sec:Enumerate"
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7109 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7110 It has these properties:
7113 \begin_layout Enumerate
7114 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7118 \begin_layout Enumerate
7119 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7123 \begin_layout Enumerate
7125 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7133 environment resets the counter to one.
7136 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7151 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7152 Items can have any length.
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7159 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7168 \begin_layout Standard
7178 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7180 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7181 labels the four different levels in an
7188 \begin_layout Enumerate
7189 The first level of an
7193 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7197 \begin_layout Enumerate
7198 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7202 \begin_layout Enumerate
7203 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7207 \begin_layout Enumerate
7208 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7211 \begin_layout Enumerate
7213 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7217 \begin_layout Enumerate
7218 Back to the third level
7222 \begin_layout Enumerate
7223 Back to the second level.
7227 \begin_layout Enumerate
7228 Back to the outermost level.
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7238 \begin_inset space ~
7242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7244 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7250 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7251 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 There is more to nesting
7260 environments than we've stated here.
7261 You should read section
7262 \begin_inset space ~
7266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7268 reference "sec:Nesting"
7273 to learn more about nesting.
7276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7278 \begin_inset Index idx
7283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7302 \begin_layout Standard
7303 Unlike the previous two environments,
7308 list has no fixed label.
7312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7319 of the first line as the label.
7323 \begin_layout Description
7325 This is an example of the
7332 \begin_layout Standard
7334 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7346 it is meant that the first usage of the
7350 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7351 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7359 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7365 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7374 \begin_inset space ~
7378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7380 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7385 for more information.) Here is an example:
7388 \begin_layout Description
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7394 This one shows how to use a
7397 \begin_inset space ~
7409 \begin_layout Description
7415 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7416 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7417 It's not a good idea to use a
7421 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7422 You're better off using
7434 paragraphs into them.
7437 \begin_layout Description
7443 environments inside one another,
7444 nest them in other types of lists,
7448 \begin_layout Standard
7449 Notice that after the first line,
7451 indents subsequent lines,
7452 offsetting them from the first line.
7455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7457 \begin_inset Index idx
7462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7464 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7486 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7487 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 \begin_layout Standard
7500 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7501 Here are its properties:
7504 \begin_layout Labeling
7505 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7510 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7519 of each line as the item label.
7524 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7525 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7526 use a non-breaking space as described above.
7529 \begin_layout Labeling
7530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7531 margins As you can see,
7533 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7534 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7535 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7538 \begin_layout Labeling
7539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7541 \begin_inset space ~
7544 width \SpecialChar LyX
7545 uses the width of the label,
7546 or the default width,
7548 If the label width is larger,
7550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7557 into the first line.
7559 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7562 \begin_layout Labeling
7563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7568 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7572 environment has the same left margin.
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 To change the default width,
7577 select all items in the list.
7580 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7582 \begin_inset space ~
7587 dialog (toolbar button
7590 arg "layout-paragraph"
7597 \begin_inset space ~
7602 determines the default label width.
7603 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7604 but you can also use the letter
7605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7612 multiple times instead.
7613 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7623 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7626 \begin_inset space ~
7631 every time you alter a label in a
7636 \begin_inset Newline newline
7639 The predefined default width is the length of
7640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7648 \begin_inset space ~
7654 \begin_layout Standard
7659 list the same way as the
7664 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7669 environment gives you another way to do this,
7670 using a different overall layout.
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7678 lists inside one another,
7679 nest them in other types of lists,
7681 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7683 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7689 reference "sec:Nesting"
7694 to learn about nesting.
7697 \begin_layout Standard
7698 There is yet another feature of the
7703 As you can see in the examples,
7705 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7706 You can use additional
7710 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7711 justifies the item label.
7716 are documented in section
7717 \begin_inset space ~
7721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7723 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7729 Here are some examples:
7732 \begin_layout Labeling
7733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7734 Left The default for
7741 \begin_layout Labeling
7742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7743 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7750 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7753 \begin_layout Labeling
7754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7755 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7759 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7766 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7769 \begin_layout Subsection
7771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7773 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7778 \begin_inset Index idx
7783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_layout Standard
7803 The features described in this section require that the module
7805 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7807 is loaded in the document settings.
7808 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7822 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7840 Custom Enumerate Lists
7841 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7858 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7875 \begin_layout Standard
7877 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
7879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7882 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7883 There you add the command
7886 \begin_layout Standard
7894 \begin_layout Standard
7906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7907 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7910 \begin_inset space ~
7914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7916 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7930 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7937 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7938 For capital Roman numerals replace
7950 in the command above.
7951 For Arabic numerals use
7959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7966 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 You can only number 26
7994 \begin_inset space ~
7997 items with Latin letters,
7998 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8007 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8008 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8014 \begin_layout Standard
8015 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8018 \begin_layout Enumerate
8019 \begin_inset Argument 1
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8048 \begin_layout Enumerate
8049 \begin_inset Argument 1
8052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 \begin_layout Enumerate
8080 \begin_layout Enumerate
8081 \begin_inset Argument 1
8084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8108 \begin_layout Enumerate
8109 \begin_inset Argument 1
8112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8138 \begin_layout Standard
8139 For this list these commands were used:
8142 \begin_layout Standard
8153 \begin_inset Newline newline
8161 \begin_inset Newline newline
8169 \begin_inset Newline newline
8179 \begin_layout Standard
8186 makes the label emphasized and
8195 \begin_layout Standard
8196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8205 When you change the label of a list level,
8206 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8216 \begin_inset Index idx
8221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8233 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8251 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8254 \begin_layout Enumerate
8255 \begin_inset Argument 1
8258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8277 \begin_inset Note Note
8280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8281 goes back to default numbering
8289 \begin_layout Enumerate
8293 \begin_layout Standard
8297 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8301 \begin_layout Standard
8302 To resume an enumeration,
8311 \begin_layout Standard
8312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8321 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8322 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8333 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8334 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8345 \begin_layout Standard
8350 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8354 \begin_layout Enumerate
8358 \begin_layout Enumerate
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8363 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8366 \begin_layout Enumerate
8367 \begin_inset Argument 1
8370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 This enumeration starts at 4
8389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8391 \begin_inset Index idx
8396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8415 \begin_layout Standard
8416 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8417 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 with standard spacing
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8430 Add there the command
8434 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8437 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_inset Argument 1
8441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8460 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 \begin_layout Standard
8469 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8475 \begin_inset Index idx
8480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8483 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8498 For more information see its documentation,
8500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8512 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8516 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8519 \begin_layout Enumerate
8520 \begin_inset Argument 1
8523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8545 \begin_layout Enumerate
8546 with negative indentation
8549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8550 Further Customization
8551 \begin_inset Index idx
8556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8575 \begin_layout Standard
8576 You can also change the style of description lists.
8580 \begin_layout Standard
8586 \begin_layout Standard
8587 changes the description label font,
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_layout Standard
8598 sets the list style.
8601 \begin_layout Standard
8602 An example where the command
8605 \begin_layout Standard
8614 \begin_layout Standard
8618 \begin_layout Description
8620 \begin_inset space ~
8625 \begin_inset Argument 1
8628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8650 therefore ionizing them.
8653 \begin_layout Description
8655 \begin_inset space ~
8659 In computer science,
8660 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8662 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8664 disk space or other resource.
8667 \begin_layout Standard
8668 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8674 \begin_inset Index idx
8679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8682 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8697 For more information see its documentation
8698 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8708 \begin_layout Subsection
8710 \begin_inset Index idx
8715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8726 \begin_inset space ~
8733 \begin_layout Standard
8734 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8735 has document classes for letters,
8736 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8743 \begin_inset space ~
8749 To use the letter class,
8750 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8751 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8752 gags on the document.
8761 \begin_inset space ~
8766 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8767 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8768 though you can't nest anything in them.
8771 \begin_layout Standard
8773 you're not limited to using
8780 \begin_inset space ~
8789 \begin_inset space ~
8796 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8803 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8810 \begin_layout Standard
8815 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8816 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8821 \begin_inset space ~
8826 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
8827 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8828 Here's an example of each:
8831 \begin_layout Right Address
8833 \begin_inset Newline newline
8837 \begin_inset Newline newline
8841 \begin_inset Newline newline
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8852 \begin_inset space ~
8858 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
8859 which \SpecialChar LyX
8860 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
8861 Here's an example of the
8868 \begin_layout Address
8870 \begin_inset Newline newline
8873 Where do I send this
8874 \begin_inset Newline newline
8877 Your post office and country
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8889 \begin_inset space ~
8894 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8899 in either of these environments,
8901 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8916 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8925 arg "newline-insert newline"
8930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8931 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8933 \begin_inset space ~
8937 \begin_inset space ~
8942 ) to start a new line in an
8949 \begin_inset space ~
8957 \begin_layout Subsection
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8964 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8969 \begin_inset Index idx
8974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8983 \begin_layout Standard
8988 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8990 you could use this environment anywhere,
8991 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8994 don't bother trying to nest
8998 in anything else or vice versa.
9004 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9005 The book document classes ignores the
9010 and it's utterly silly to use
9014 in a letter document class.
9017 \begin_layout Standard
9022 environment does several things for you.
9024 it puts the centered label
9025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9033 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9035 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9036 just as you'd expect.
9038 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9040 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9042 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9050 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9051 The new paragraph will still be in the
9057 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset Float figure
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9070 \begin_inset Graphics
9071 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9079 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9084 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9105 \begin_layout Standard
9106 We would love to demonstrate the
9111 but since this document is in the
9112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9121 We inserted it therefore as figure
9122 \begin_inset space ~
9126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9128 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9134 If you have never heard of an
9135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9143 you can safely ignore this environment.
9146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9148 \begin_inset Index idx
9153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9162 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9174 environment is used to list references.
9176 you could use this environment anywhere,
9177 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 When you first open a
9196 adds a large vertical space,
9197 followed by the heading
9198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9213 depending on the document class.
9214 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9215 Each paragraph of the
9219 environment is a bibliography entry.
9225 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9226 Each new paragraph is still in the
9233 \begin_layout Standard
9235 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9237 For more information on that,
9238 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9239 's bibliography handling,
9240 have a look at section
9241 \begin_inset space ~
9245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9247 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9255 \begin_layout Subsection
9256 Special Environments
9259 \begin_layout Standard
9261 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9269 \begin_inset Index idx
9274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9284 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9297 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9299 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9304 key as a fixed whitespace.
9308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9322 \begin_inset space ~
9327 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9346 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9348 If you need to insert blank lines,
9349 you will still need to use
9352 arg "newline-insert newline"
9371 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9373 when you finish using the
9379 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9386 environment inside of others.
9389 \begin_layout Standard
9390 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9393 \begin_layout Itemize
9397 arg "newline-insert newline"
9400 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9405 \begin_inset space \space{}
9415 arg "newline-insert newline"
9421 \begin_layout Itemize
9425 arg "newline-insert newline"
9435 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9441 \begin_layout Itemize
9442 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9443 You must put at least one
9447 in any line you want blank.
9453 \begin_layout Itemize
9454 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9458 since that will insert
9463 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9466 arg "self-insert \""
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9476 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9480 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9484 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9488 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9492 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9493 printf("Hello World!
9498 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9502 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9506 \begin_layout Standard
9507 This is just the standard
9508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9518 \begin_layout Standard
9526 such as program source,
9527 shell scripts and so on.
9528 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9529 \begin_inset Index idx
9534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9535 Paragraph environments
9540 For longer parts of programming code,
9541 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9543 Program Code Listings
9548 \begin_inset space ~
9556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9560 \begin_inset Index idx
9565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9574 \begin_layout Standard
9579 environment is similar to the
9584 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9589 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9603 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a non-breaking space) and you can have empty lines.
9617 \begin_layout Itemize
9618 have a certain language and a text style
9621 \begin_layout Itemize
9624 foot- and margin notes,
9628 index- and nomenclature entries,
9633 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9637 \begin_layout Standard
9638 Because of these properties
9642 works like a typewriter.
9646 \begin_layout Verbatim
9650 \begin_layout Verbatim
9653 The following 2 lines are empty:
9656 \begin_layout Verbatim
9660 \begin_layout Verbatim
9664 \begin_layout Verbatim
9665 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9670 \begin_layout Standard
9675 environment is identical to
9679 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9680 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9687 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9691 \begin_layout Section
9692 Nesting Environments
9693 \begin_inset Index idx
9698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9700 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9724 \begin_layout Subsection
9728 \begin_layout Standard
9730 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9731 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9732 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9733 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9735 you have a list inside of another list,
9737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9751 \begin_layout Enumerate
9756 \begin_layout Enumerate
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9765 \begin_layout Enumerate
9769 \begin_layout Standard
9770 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9771 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9776 \begin_inset space ~
9780 \begin_inset space ~
9788 \begin_inset space ~
9792 \begin_inset space ~
9797 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9798 Instead of the menu,
9799 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9802 arg "depth-increment"
9808 arg "depth-decrement"
9822 arg "depth-increment"
9828 arg "depth-decrement"
9832 The change will work on the current selection,
9833 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9834 or the current paragraph.
9837 \begin_layout Standard
9838 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9839 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9840 If it is invalid to do so,
9841 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9843 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9844 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9847 \begin_layout Standard
9848 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9851 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9852 as you're about to find out.
9853 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9856 \begin_layout Subsection
9857 What You Can and Can't Nest
9860 \begin_layout Standard
9861 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9862 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9865 \begin_layout Standard
9866 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9867 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9870 \begin_layout Itemize
9871 Completely unnestable
9874 \begin_layout Itemize
9876 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9879 \begin_layout Itemize
9881 you can nest them into other environments,
9882 but you can't nest anything into them.
9885 \begin_layout Standard
9886 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9887 and which paragraph environments have them:
9890 \begin_layout Description
9891 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9892 Can't nest into them.
9896 \begin_layout Itemize
9902 \begin_layout Itemize
9908 \begin_layout Itemize
9914 \begin_layout Itemize
9920 \begin_layout Itemize
9927 \begin_layout Description
9929 \begin_inset space ~
9932 Nestable You can nest them.
9933 You can nest other things into them.
9937 \begin_layout Itemize
9943 \begin_layout Itemize
9949 \begin_layout Itemize
9955 \begin_layout Itemize
9961 \begin_layout Itemize
9967 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 \begin_layout Itemize
9979 \begin_layout Itemize
9986 \begin_layout Itemize
9992 \begin_layout Itemize
9999 \begin_layout Description
10000 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10001 You can't nest anything into them.
10005 \begin_layout Itemize
10011 \begin_layout Itemize
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10023 \begin_layout Itemize
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10035 \begin_layout Itemize
10041 \begin_layout Itemize
10047 \begin_layout Itemize
10053 \begin_layout Itemize
10059 \begin_layout Itemize
10065 \begin_layout Itemize
10071 \begin_layout Itemize
10077 \begin_layout Itemize
10083 \begin_layout Itemize
10087 \begin_inset space ~
10093 \begin_layout Itemize
10100 \begin_layout Standard
10101 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10110 Although it is possible,
10112 to nest numbered section headings like
10123 \begin_inset space ~
10127 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10135 \begin_layout Subsection
10136 Nesting Other Things:
10141 \begin_inset Index idx
10146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10148 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10165 \begin_layout Standard
10166 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10167 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10171 \begin_layout Itemize
10175 \begin_layout Itemize
10179 \begin_layout Itemize
10183 \begin_layout Standard
10185 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 Figures and tables in
10198 are not affected by this.
10203 Have a look at section
10204 \begin_inset space ~
10208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10210 reference "sec:Floats"
10215 for more information about
10222 \begin_layout Standard
10224 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10227 or an equation is inline,
10228 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10231 \begin_layout Standard
10233 if you have an equation,
10234 figure or table in a
10235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10243 it behaves just like a
10244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10251 paragraph environment.
10252 You can nest it into any environment,
10253 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10256 \begin_layout Standard
10257 Here's an example with a table:
10260 \begin_layout Enumerate
10265 \begin_layout Enumerate
10266 This is (a) and it's nested.
10270 \begin_layout Standard
10271 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Tabular
10280 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10281 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10282 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10283 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10367 \begin_layout Standard
10368 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10375 \begin_layout Enumerate
10377 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10381 \begin_layout Enumerate
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10387 the list would look like this:
10390 \begin_layout Enumerate
10395 \begin_layout Enumerate
10396 This is (a) and it's nested.
10400 \begin_layout Standard
10401 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10407 \begin_layout Standard
10409 \begin_inset Tabular
10410 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10411 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10497 \begin_layout Standard
10498 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10504 \begin_layout Enumerate
10512 it's not nested at all.
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Standard
10520 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10521 but is also the first item of a new list!
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 There's another trap you can fall into:
10527 but not going deep enough.
10529 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10532 \begin_layout Enumerate
10537 \begin_layout Enumerate
10538 This is (a) and it's nested.
10541 \begin_layout Standard
10542 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10550 \begin_inset Tabular
10551 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10552 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10646 \begin_layout Enumerate
10648 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10656 \begin_layout Enumerate
10660 \begin_layout Standard
10662 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10668 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10670 if you nest tables,
10671 figures or equations,
10672 make sure you go to the right depth!
10675 \begin_layout Subsection
10676 Usage and General Features
10679 \begin_layout Standard
10680 Speaking of levels,
10682 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10692 is the innermost possible depth.
10693 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10696 \begin_layout Enumerate
10697 level #1 – outermost
10701 \begin_layout Enumerate
10706 \begin_layout Enumerate
10711 \begin_layout Enumerate
10716 \begin_layout Itemize
10721 \begin_layout Itemize
10730 \begin_layout Standard
10731 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10732 and you can see both of them in the example.
10733 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10734 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10744 if we tried to nest another
10749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10757 we would get errors.
10760 \begin_layout Subsection
10762 \begin_inset Index idx
10767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10769 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10786 \begin_layout Standard
10787 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10788 We have several examples of nested environments.
10790 we explain how we created the example,
10791 so that you can reproduce them.
10794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10796 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10799 \begin_layout Labeling
10800 \labelwidthstring MMM
10801 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10810 \begin_layout Labeling
10811 \labelwidthstring MMM
10812 #2-a This is level #2.
10813 We created it by using
10816 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10822 arg "depth-increment"
10829 \begin_layout Labeling
10830 \labelwidthstring MMM
10831 #3-a This is level #3.
10841 arg "depth-increment"
10845 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10849 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10855 arg "depth-increment"
10862 \begin_layout Standard
10869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10879 We did this by entering
10882 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10889 arg "depth-increment"
10893 then changing the paragraph environment to
10898 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10899 it also works for the
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10926 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10932 \begin_layout Labeling
10933 \labelwidthstring MMM
10934 #4-a This is level #4.
10938 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10941 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10947 we can't nest anything inside a
10952 which is why we're still at level #4.
10958 keep nesting things inside
10959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10970 \begin_layout Labeling
10971 \labelwidthstring MMM
10972 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10977 \begin_layout Labeling
10978 \labelwidthstring MMM
10979 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10980 and this is level #6.
10982 you should know how we made these two.
10986 \begin_layout Labeling
10987 \labelwidthstring MMM
10988 #5-b Back to level #5.
10992 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10998 arg "depth-decrement"
11005 \begin_layout Labeling
11006 \labelwidthstring MMM
11010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11016 arg "depth-decrement"
11020 we're back at level #4.
11024 \begin_layout Labeling
11025 \labelwidthstring MMM
11026 #3-b Back to level #3.
11027 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11031 \begin_layout Labeling
11032 \labelwidthstring MMM
11033 #2-b Back to level #2.
11037 \begin_layout Labeling
11038 \labelwidthstring MMM
11040 back to the outermost level,
11042 After this sentence,
11047 and change the paragraph environment back to
11054 \begin_layout Standard
11055 We could have also used the
11074 environment in place of the
11079 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11087 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11088 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11093 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11103 arg "depth-increment"
11108 \begin_inset Newline newline
11112 we will change to the
11120 \begin_layout Enumerate
11129 \begin_layout Enumerate
11130 Notice how the nested
11134 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11139 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11143 \begin_layout Standard
11144 We ended this example by entering
11150 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11154 and reset the nesting depth by using
11157 arg "depth-decrement"
11163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11176 \begin_inset Argument 1
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 Levels and other list environments
11190 \begin_layout Enumerate
11196 paragraph environment.
11197 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11201 \begin_layout Enumerate
11206 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11212 arg "depth-increment"
11217 what happens if we nest an
11221 environment inside of this one?
11222 It will be at level #3,
11223 but what will its label be?
11228 \begin_layout Itemize
11240 even though it's at level #3.
11242 its label is a bullet.
11243 (We got here by using
11246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11253 arg "depth-increment"
11257 then changing the environment to
11265 \begin_layout Itemize
11270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11277 arg "depth-increment"
11281 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11286 \begin_layout Enumerate
11288 to get to level #5.
11291 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11296 Notice the type of numbering,
11302 because we are in the
11310 environment (that is,
11326 \begin_layout Enumerate
11331 change the paragraph environment,
11332 but decrease the nesting depth?
11333 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11337 \begin_layout Enumerate
11339 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11346 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11349 \begin_layout Enumerate
11353 arg "depth-decrement"
11356 to decrease the depth after the next
11359 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11366 \begin_layout Enumerate
11368 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11373 \begin_layout Enumerate
11375 Even though we've changed levels,
11377 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11380 \begin_layout Enumerate
11382 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11394 that \SpecialChar LyX
11399 reset the counter for the label.
11403 \begin_layout Enumerate
11407 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11413 arg "depth-decrement"
11417 and we're back to level #2.
11419 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11420 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11428 \begin_layout Enumerate
11429 The same thing happens if we do another
11432 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11438 arg "depth-decrement"
11441 sequence and return to level #1,
11442 the outermost level.
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11447 we reset the environment to
11453 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11463 The number of other
11467 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11473 The same rule applies for the
11481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11486 \begin_layout Enumerate
11487 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11488 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11489 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11508 arg "depth-increment"
11517 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11519 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11520 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11521 Either before or after this,
11522 we will put in the level.
11526 \begin_layout Enumerate
11533 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11537 \begin_layout Verse
11538 Now we will add verse.
11539 \begin_inset Newline newline
11542 It will get much worse.
11543 \begin_inset Newline newline
11554 arg "depth-increment"
11566 \begin_layout Verse
11569 \begin_inset Newline newline
11572 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11573 \begin_inset Newline newline
11579 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11587 \begin_layout Verse
11588 Here comes a table:
11592 \begin_layout Standard
11593 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11599 \begin_layout Standard
11601 \begin_inset Tabular
11602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11603 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11690 \begin_layout Verse
11694 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11706 arg "depth-increment"
11713 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11720 \begin_inset Newline newline
11728 arg "depth-decrement"
11735 \begin_layout Enumerate
11742 level #1) This is another item.
11743 Note that selecting a
11747 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11748 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11755 \begin_layout Quotation
11756 We're now ending the
11760 list and changing to
11765 We're still at level #1.
11766 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11767 The next set of paragraphs is a
11768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11775 We will nest both the
11782 \begin_inset space ~
11787 environments inside of this one,
11788 then use another nested
11792 for the letter body.
11796 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11799 to preserve the depth.
11800 Remember that you need to use
11803 arg "newline-insert newline"
11806 to create multiple lines inside the
11813 \begin_inset space ~
11823 \begin_layout Right Address
11825 \begin_inset Newline newline
11830 \begin_inset Newline newline
11836 \begin_layout Address
11838 \begin_inset space ~
11844 \begin_layout Quotation
11845 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11849 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11851 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11852 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11853 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11855 we thank you for your patience.
11858 \begin_layout Quotation
11861 now have a special on beef.
11862 If you are interested,
11863 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11864 along with payment.
11867 \begin_layout Quotation
11868 We thank you again for your patience.
11871 \begin_layout Address
11873 \begin_inset Newline newline
11880 \begin_layout Quotation
11881 That ends that example!
11884 \begin_layout Standard
11886 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11887 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11888 We could have easily nested an
11910 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11913 \begin_layout Subsection
11915 \begin_inset Index idx
11920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11939 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11946 \begin_layout Standard
11947 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11948 For example you need two different enumerations:
11951 \begin_layout Enumerate
11956 \begin_layout Enumerate
11961 \begin_layout Enumerate
11965 \begin_layout Standard
11966 \begin_inset Separator plain
11972 \begin_layout Itemize
11978 \begin_layout Standard
11979 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11985 \begin_layout Enumerate
11989 \begin_layout Enumerate
11993 \begin_layout Enumerate
11997 \begin_layout Standard
11998 To split an existing list into two lists,
11999 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12002 Separated <Name> Above
12006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12007 Separated <Name> Below
12010 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12011 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12012 Inside nested environments,
12013 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12016 \begin_layout Standard
12017 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12018 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12021 \begin_layout Standard
12023 you get an environment separator when you press
12026 arg "paragraph-break"
12033 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12036 \begin_layout Section
12038 Pagination and Line Breaks
12039 \begin_inset Index idx
12044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12057 offers you more spaces:
12058 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12059 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12062 \begin_layout Subsection
12064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12066 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12071 \begin_inset Index idx
12076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 The non-breaking space:
12097 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12098 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 ) not to automatically break the line at that point.
12100 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12104 \begin_layout Quote
12105 Further documentation is given in section
12106 \begin_inset Newline newline
12110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12112 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12120 \begin_layout Standard
12122 it would be a good thing to put a non-breaking space between
12123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12137 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12147 A non-breaking space is set with
12149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12150 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12152 \begin_inset space ~
12160 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12166 \begin_layout Subsection
12168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12170 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12175 \begin_inset Index idx
12180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12200 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 The length units are listed in Appendix
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12214 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12226 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12231 \begin_inset Index idx
12236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12238 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12255 \begin_layout Standard
12256 With the introduction of typewriters,
12257 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12258 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12259 automatically takes care about this.
12261 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12263 \begin_inset space ~
12267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12269 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12275 To insert a normal space,
12278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12289 arg "space-insert normal"
12295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12296 Non-Breaking Thin Space
12297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12299 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12304 \begin_inset Index idx
12309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12311 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 \begin_layout Standard
12330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12333 non-breaking thin space
12334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12337 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12346 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12348 inside abbreviations:
12351 \begin_layout Quote
12353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12357 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12361 or between values and units.
12362 Compare for example this:
12363 \begin_inset Newline newline
12367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12371 \begin_inset Newline newline
12374 10 kg (normal space)
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12381 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12395 arg "space-insert thin"
12401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 You can also insert the following space types:
12409 \begin_layout Description
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12414 space A line with a
12415 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12419 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12423 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12426 medium space between the arrows.
12429 \begin_layout Description
12431 \begin_inset space ~
12434 space A line with a
12435 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12439 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12443 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12446 thick space between the arrows.
12449 \begin_layout Description
12451 \begin_inset space ~
12455 \begin_inset space ~
12458 space A line with a
12459 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12463 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12467 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12470 negative thin space between the arrows.
12473 \begin_layout Description
12475 \begin_inset space ~
12479 \begin_inset space ~
12482 space A line with a
12483 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12487 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12491 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12494 negative medium space between the arrows.
12497 \begin_layout Description
12499 \begin_inset space ~
12503 \begin_inset space ~
12506 space A line with a
12507 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12511 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12515 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12518 negative thick space between the arrows.
12521 \begin_layout Description
12523 \begin_inset space ~
12527 \begin_inset space ~
12531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12535 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12539 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12543 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12547 \begin_inset space ~
12551 \begin_inset space ~
12555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12558 em) space between the arrows.
12561 \begin_layout Description
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12571 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12575 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12579 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12583 \begin_inset space ~
12587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12590 em) space between the arrows.
12593 \begin_layout Description
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12599 \begin_inset space ~
12603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12607 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12611 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12615 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12619 \begin_inset space ~
12623 \begin_inset space ~
12627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12630 em) space between the arrows.
12633 \begin_layout Description
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12643 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12648 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12655 cm space between the arrows.
12658 \begin_layout Standard
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12666 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12671 lists the different space sizes.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 \begin_inset Float table
12682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12683 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12688 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12692 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12702 \begin_inset Tabular
12703 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12704 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12705 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12706 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12760 Non-breaking Normal
12765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12798 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12812 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12836 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12869 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12932 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12945 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12954 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12968 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13037 \begin_inset Index idx
13042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13061 \begin_layout Standard
13062 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13063 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13064 An Horizontal Fill is actually a variable length space,
13065 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13066 If there is more than one Horizontal Fill on a line,
13067 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13070 \begin_layout Standard
13071 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13074 \begin_layout Quote
13076 This is on the left side
13077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13080 This is on the right
13083 \begin_layout Quote
13086 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13090 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13096 \begin_layout Quote
13099 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13103 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13107 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13113 \begin_layout Standard
13114 That was an example in the
13120 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13124 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13128 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13131 is one in a standard paragraph.
13132 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13137 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13140 \begin_layout Standard
13141 Horizontal Fills can be made visible when you choose one of the
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13149 s in the space dialog:
13150 The following patterns are available:
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13156 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13160 \begin_inset space ~
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13169 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 \begin_layout Standard
13182 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13186 \begin_inset space ~
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13195 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13205 \begin_layout Standard
13206 Down brace (= opened downwards):
13208 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13218 \begin_layout Standard
13219 Up brace (= opened upwards):
13221 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13231 \begin_layout Standard
13232 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13241 If an Horizontal Fill is at the beginning of a line,
13246 in the first line in a paragraph,
13249 This prevents Horizontal Fills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13250 If you need space in this case anyway,
13255 option in the space dialog.
13263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13267 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13272 \begin_inset Index idx
13277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13296 \begin_layout Standard
13297 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13299 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13302 \begin_layout Standard
13303 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13306 What is correct English?:
13307 \begin_inset Newline newline
13311 \begin_inset Newline newline
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13318 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13319 \begin_inset Newline newline
13323 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13334 \begin_inset Newline newline
13338 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13349 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13355 \begin_layout Standard
13357 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13362 \begin_inset space ~
13366 \begin_inset space ~
13370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13375 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13378 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13382 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13387 \begin_inset space ~
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13398 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13407 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13408 That is why it is named
13409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13417 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13418 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13421 \begin_layout Subsection
13423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13425 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13430 \begin_inset Index idx
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13455 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13459 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13467 There you find the following sizes:
13470 \begin_layout Standard
13484 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13485 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13490 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13501 \begin_inset Index idx
13506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13508 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13522 for the paragraph separation.
13523 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13534 \begin_layout Standard
13543 equal to the height,
13544 or half the height,
13545 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
13548 \begin_layout Standard
13554 \begin_inset Index idx
13559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13575 is a variable space,
13576 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13578 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13583 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
13584 because the space between them is then maximal.
13594 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13603 s are described in section
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13610 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13620 If there are several
13625 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13626 You can therefore use
13630 s to center text on a page,
13631 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13634 \begin_layout Standard
13639 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13640 \begin_inset space ~
13644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13646 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13654 \begin_layout Standard
13655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
13667 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13679 \begin_layout Subsection
13680 Paragraph Alignment
13681 \begin_inset Index idx
13686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13688 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13705 \begin_layout Standard
13706 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13711 dialog (toolbar button
13714 arg "layout-paragraph"
13718 There are five possibilities:
13721 \begin_layout Itemize
13729 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13735 \begin_layout Itemize
13743 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13749 \begin_layout Itemize
13757 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13763 \begin_layout Itemize
13771 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13777 \begin_layout Itemize
13785 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13791 \begin_layout Standard
13792 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13793 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13794 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13795 and look like this:
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13800 This paragraph is right aligned,
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13805 this one is centered,
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13810 this one is left aligned.
13813 \begin_layout Subsection
13815 \begin_inset Index idx
13820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13822 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13839 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13847 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13848 does the page breaks in your document,
13849 you can force a page break where you want one.
13850 Normally this will not be necessary,
13851 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13852 is good at page breaking.
13853 Only if you use a lot of
13859 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13862 \begin_layout Standard
13863 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13867 have to change the page breaking.
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 There are two types of page breaks:
13872 One that ends the page without any special action.
13873 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13876 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13878 \begin_inset space ~
13885 that is inserted via the menu
13887 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13888 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13890 \begin_inset space ~
13896 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13897 so that it fills out the complete page.
13898 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13901 \begin_layout Standard
13902 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13905 the wrong way to do it.
13907 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13908 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13912 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13917 to learn more about
13924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13928 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13933 \begin_inset Index idx
13938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13940 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13957 \begin_layout Standard
13958 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13959 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13960 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13961 including unprocessed floats,
13962 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13963 if necessary by adding pages.
13966 \begin_layout Standard
13967 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13970 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13972 \begin_inset space ~
13978 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13979 you can use the menu
13981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13982 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13984 \begin_inset space ~
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13993 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
13994 if necessary by adding a page.
13997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13998 Suppressing Page Breaks
13999 \begin_inset Index idx
14004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14006 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14023 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14030 \begin_layout Standard
14031 To discourage page break at a certain point you can use
14033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14034 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14038 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14041 \begin_layout Subsection
14043 \begin_inset Index idx
14048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14057 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14064 \begin_layout Standard
14065 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14066 one simply breaks the line.
14067 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14070 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14072 \begin_inset space ~
14076 \begin_inset space ~
14084 arg "newline-insert newline"
14088 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14093 \begin_inset space ~
14097 \begin_inset space ~
14105 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14108 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14109 This is useful to avoid
14110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14117 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14120 \begin_layout Standard
14121 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14123 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14124 is very good at line breaking.
14127 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14129 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14130 \begin_inset space ~
14134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14136 reference "sec:Quote"
14143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14145 reference "sec:Verse"
14151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14153 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14161 \begin_layout Subsection
14163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14165 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14170 \begin_inset Index idx
14175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14184 \begin_layout Standard
14186 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14197 \begin_layout Standard
14201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14202 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14204 \begin_inset space ~
14209 you can insert horizontal lines.
14210 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14211 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14216 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14227 \begin_layout Section
14228 Characters and Symbols
14231 \begin_layout Standard
14232 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14233 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14235 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14243 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14248 for information on how this is done.
14251 \begin_layout Standard
14252 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14257 dialog via the menu
14259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14260 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14266 \begin_layout Standard
14267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14276 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14278 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14286 \begin_layout Section
14287 Fonts and Text Styles
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14290 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14297 \begin_layout Subsection
14299 \begin_inset Index idx
14304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14306 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14323 \begin_layout Standard
14324 There are two types of fonts:
14327 \begin_layout Description
14329 \begin_inset space ~
14333 \begin_inset Index idx
14338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14354 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14359 characters) in the font.
14360 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14361 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14362 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14363 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14364 \begin_inset Newline newline
14367 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14368 But to achieve a better quality,
14369 many fonts define several font sizes.
14370 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14371 \begin_inset Newline newline
14387 \begin_inset space ~
14395 \begin_layout Description
14397 \begin_inset space ~
14401 \begin_inset Index idx
14406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14408 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14423 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14424 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14426 they don't scale well,
14427 because in order to scale a glyph,
14428 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14429 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14430 In order to mitigate this effect,
14431 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14432 \begin_inset space ~
14435 pixels high up to 34
14436 \begin_inset space ~
14439 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14440 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14441 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14442 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14444 \begin_inset Newline newline
14447 Bitmap fonts are named
14450 \begin_inset space ~
14455 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14458 \begin_layout Standard
14459 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
14460 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14461 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14462 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
14465 \begin_layout Standard
14466 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
14467 look at its document properties.
14470 \begin_layout Standard
14471 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying text styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14473 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
14474 to emphasize text you use an
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14485 In \SpecialChar LyX
14487 you do things based on contexts,
14488 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
14491 \begin_layout Subsection
14494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14496 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14503 \begin_layout Standard
14506 used its own fonts.
14508 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
14509 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14511 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14512 needs some extra information about the fonts,
14513 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14514 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
14515 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
14516 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14517 files are very portable across different machines.
14519 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14520 has increased a lot in the meantime;
14521 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
14523 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14530 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14536 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14537 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14540 \begin_layout Standard
14541 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14542 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
14543 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14544 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14546 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14549 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
14550 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14553 \begin_layout Standard
14554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14566 or other font deficiencies;
14567 so you might have to experiment.
14575 \begin_layout Subsection
14576 Document Font and Font size
14577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14579 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14584 \begin_inset Index idx
14589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14606 \begin_inset Index idx
14611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14613 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14630 \begin_layout Standard
14631 You can set the document fonts in the
14633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14637 \begin_inset Index idx
14642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14644 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14663 section of the dialog,
14664 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
14669 \begin_inset space ~
14679 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
14680 \begin_inset space ~
14683 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14686 \begin_layout Standard
14692 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14693 This requires that you use
14706 as the output format,
14708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14712 \begin_inset space \space{}
14715 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14716 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14717 installed (see section
14718 \begin_inset space ~
14722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14724 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14730 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14732 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14733 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14735 \begin_inset space ~
14740 since \SpecialChar LyX
14741 cannot determine the family.
14742 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
14743 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14746 cannot determine this in advance,
14747 so you might need to experiment.
14750 \begin_layout Standard
14751 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14752 fonts (which is the default),
14753 the possible options for the font include
14757 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14764 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14765 With LyX's automatic font encoding,
14767 depending on the document language,
14768 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14789 ) or a look-alike of this font:
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14808 European Computer Modern
14811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14820 some classes set different default fonts.
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14829 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14830 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14835 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14838 \begin_inset space ~
14843 version 6 or later,
14844 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14849 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14850 you have to use a vector font.
14851 Depending on how your document should look,
14855 \begin_layout Itemize
14859 \begin_inset space ~
14865 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14877 \begin_inset space ~
14882 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14883 community in order to replace
14887 as the default font.
14888 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14889 Except for some details,
14890 where the appearance was improved,
14894 \begin_inset space ~
14907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14908 One difference is improved kerning.
14916 \begin_layout Itemize
14917 If you do not like the look of
14926 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14932 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14948 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14949 \begin_inset space ~
14952 serif and typewriter fonts,
14956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14957 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14965 \begin_inset space ~
14974 for sans serif text),
14975 or different shapes of the same font,
14977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14981 \begin_inset space \space{}
14989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14993 \begin_inset space \space{}
14999 \begin_inset space ~
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15017 but you can also select your own.
15018 \begin_inset Newline newline
15021 The differences between roman,
15025 \begin_inset space ~
15034 fonts are explained in section
15035 \begin_inset space ~
15039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15041 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15053 \begin_inset space ~
15058 was originally designed for newspapers.
15059 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15063 \begin_inset space ~
15068 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15071 \begin_layout Standard
15072 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15088 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15093 depends on the class you are using.
15094 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15097 \begin_layout Standard
15098 Note that the font size is the
15103 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15104 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15106 and subscripts) by this value.
15107 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15110 \begin_inset space ~
15116 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15117 \begin_inset space ~
15121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15123 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15131 \begin_layout Standard
15135 \begin_inset space ~
15140 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15142 \begin_inset space ~
15145 serif or typewriter.
15150 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15151 the other selections override this.
15162 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15165 \begin_layout Standard
15170 LaTeX font encoding
15172 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15178 \begin_inset Index idx
15183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15186 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15202 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15203 Unless you have specific reasons,
15211 \begin_layout Standard
15215 Use Old Style Figures
15219 Use True Small Caps
15222 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15225 Use Old Style Figures
15228 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15229 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15237 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15238 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15241 Use True Small Caps
15243 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15244 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15245 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15251 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15256 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15262 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15271 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15273 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15278 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15284 \begin_inset Index idx
15289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15306 So this has no effect for the document language
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15325 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15327 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15333 \begin_inset Index idx
15338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15359 \begin_layout Standard
15362 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15364 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15369 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15371 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15377 instead of ligatures (--,
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15385 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15396 \begin_layout Standard
15397 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15410 When you choose a new font or font size,
15416 change the screen font!
15417 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15418 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15420 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15427 \begin_inset space ~
15431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15433 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15446 \begin_layout Subsection
15450 \begin_layout Standard
15451 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15452 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
15453 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15454 fonts for your document,
15455 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
15457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15461 \begin_inset Index idx
15466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15483 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15484 automatically selects a math font.
15485 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15486 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15487 's default font family
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15505 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
15508 \begin_layout Standard
15509 Note that the math font will not be used for
15513 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15519 or by the insertion of the command
15526 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15527 \begin_inset space ~
15531 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
15533 \begin_inset space ~
15536 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15539 \begin_inset space ~
15547 \begin_inset space ~
15552 in the document font settings.
15555 \begin_layout Standard
15556 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15557 fonts for the document,
15558 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15559 font (in most cases
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15575 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15576 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15595 \begin_layout Subsection
15596 Using Different Text Styles
15597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15599 name "subsec:charstyles"
15604 \begin_inset Index idx
15609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15616 \begin_inset Index idx
15621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15630 \begin_layout Standard
15631 As we've already seen,
15633 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph environments.
15635 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
15636 This is where we meet the concept of
15643 \begin_layout Standard
15646 supports two text styles,
15662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15666 available with all document classes.
15668 some document classes and modules provide
15672 for specific purposes.
15673 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15679 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15688 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15693 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
15694 you selected it and chose e.
15695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 encourage the use of
15728 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
15730 \begin_inset space ~
15734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15736 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15742 Rather than fiddling with
15747 they encourage the use of
15752 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15758 \begin_inset Quotes els
15762 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15767 \begin_inset Quotes els
15771 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15775 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15777 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
15778 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15779 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15780 On a more practical level,
15781 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15782 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
15787 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15794 you would have to change any single occurrence.
15795 With a semantic markup (such as
15801 you'd just need to change the definition of
15806 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15809 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
15810 using different markup semantics.
15813 \begin_layout Standard
15815 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
15819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15820 Builtin Text Styles
15821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15823 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15830 \begin_layout Standard
15831 The two builtin text styles can be activated via the
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15846 do one of the following:
15849 \begin_layout Itemize
15850 click on the toolbar button
15859 \begin_layout Itemize
15860 use the key binding
15869 \begin_layout Itemize
15877 arg "dialog-show character"
15883 arg "dialog-show character"
15893 \begin_layout Standard
15894 This command is a toggle.
15900 style is already active,
15901 they deactivate it.
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15905 One typically uses the
15909 style for proper names.
15912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15919 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15927 \begin_layout Standard
15933 is producing text in
15938 but the definition can be changed.
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15942 A more widely used text style is the
15947 You can activate (or deactivate —
15948 it's also a toggle) the
15955 \begin_layout Itemize
15956 clicking on the toolbar button
15965 \begin_layout Itemize
15966 using the keybindings
15975 \begin_layout Itemize
15983 arg "dialog-show character"
15989 arg "dialog-show character"
15999 \begin_layout Standard
16004 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16005 packages use a different font,
16006 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16010 \begin_layout Standard
16011 We've been using the
16015 style all over the place in this document.
16016 Here's one more example:
16019 \begin_layout Quotation
16022 Do not overuse text styles!
16025 \begin_layout Standard
16026 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16027 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16028 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16029 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse text styles.
16032 \begin_layout Standard
16033 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16034 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16039 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
16050 arg "dialog-show character"
16058 arg "dialog-show character"
16064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16068 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16075 \begin_layout Standard
16076 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16077 a module (see section
16078 \begin_inset space ~
16082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16084 reference "subsec:Modules"
16093 or local layout settings (see section
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16100 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16106 As the two builtin styles,
16111 markup for specific functions.
16118 module that provides,
16119 among other things,
16120 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16132 \begin_inset Quotes els
16136 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16142 \begin_layout Standard
16143 These styles can be found,
16147 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16153 \begin_layout Standard
16154 For the purpose of demonstration,
16155 we have loaded in this document the optional module
16159 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16160 By example of the emphasized style,
16161 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
16166 appears as normal font change,
16167 the custom text style
16168 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16177 appears as an inset,
16178 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16179 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16181 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16183 \begin_inset Flex Code
16186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16215 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
16218 \begin_layout Subsection
16219 Tweaking Text with the
16224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16226 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16231 \begin_inset Index idx
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16245 \begin_layout Standard
16246 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
16247 so \SpecialChar LyX
16248 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
16250 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16252 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
16255 \begin_layout Standard
16256 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
16258 generally the better way of handling such issues),
16259 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
16264 comes in as a last resort.
16267 \begin_layout Standard
16268 Before we document how to tweak the text properties,
16269 we want to issue a warning yet again:
16270 Don't overuse that!
16272 \begin_inset Newline newline
16275 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16278 \begin_layout Standard
16279 To tweak text properties,
16283 arg "dialog-show character"
16286 dialog or press the toolbar button
16289 arg "dialog-show character"
16293 There are several combo boxes in this dialog,
16294 each corresponding to a different text property that you can choose.
16295 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
16299 \begin_inset space ~
16305 which keeps the current state of that property.
16310 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16311 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
16314 \begin_layout Standard
16320 and their options (in addition to
16323 \begin_inset space ~
16335 \begin_layout Labeling
16336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16350 The possible options are:
16354 \begin_layout Labeling
16355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16360 This is the Roman font family.
16361 Normally a serif font.
16362 It's also the default family.
16372 \begin_layout Labeling
16373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16377 \begin_inset space ~
16384 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16396 \begin_layout Labeling
16397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16404 This is the Typewriter font family.
16410 arg "font-typewriter"
16418 \begin_layout Standard
16419 The general differences of these families are:
16422 \begin_layout Itemize
16427 fonts use characters with serifs.
16428 These are the small
16429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16436 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16437 The following example shows the difference:
16438 \begin_inset Newline newline
16442 \begin_inset Newline newline
16447 text without serifs
16450 \begin_inset Newline newline
16453 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16454 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16461 \begin_layout Itemize
16466 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16467 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16468 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16471 \begin_layout Itemize
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 which means every character has the same width;
16487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16504 \begin_inset Newline newline
16508 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16522 \begin_inset Note Note
16525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16526 For more on phantoms see section
16527 \begin_inset space ~
16531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16533 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16544 \begin_inset Newline newline
16551 \begin_layout Labeling
16552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16557 This corresponds to the print weight.
16562 \begin_layout Labeling
16563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16568 This is the Medium font series.
16569 It's also the default series.
16572 \begin_layout Labeling
16573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16580 This is the Bold font series.
16593 \begin_layout Labeling
16594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16599 As the name implies.
16604 \begin_layout Labeling
16605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16610 This is the Upright font shape.
16611 It's also the default shape.
16614 \begin_layout Labeling
16615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16626 is the Italic font shape
16632 \begin_layout Labeling
16633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16640 This is the Slanted font shape
16642 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16644 this is different from italic).
16647 \begin_layout Labeling
16648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16652 \begin_inset space ~
16659 This is the Small caps font shape
16666 \begin_layout Labeling
16667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16672 Alters the size of the font.
16673 You won't find numerical values here;
16674 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
16676 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16678 but a general description of what you want to do.
16683 \begin_layout Labeling
16684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16705 arg "font-size tiny"
16711 \begin_layout Labeling
16712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16733 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16739 \begin_layout Labeling
16740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16761 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16767 \begin_layout Labeling
16768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16789 arg "font-size small"
16795 \begin_layout Labeling
16796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16810 It's also the default size.
16814 arg "font-size normal"
16820 \begin_layout Labeling
16821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 arg "font-size large"
16848 \begin_layout Labeling
16849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 arg "font-size larger"
16876 \begin_layout Labeling
16877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16898 arg "font-size largest"
16904 \begin_layout Labeling
16905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16926 arg "font-size huge"
16932 \begin_layout Labeling
16933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16954 arg "font-size giant"
16960 \begin_layout Labeling
16961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16966 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
16968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16987 arg "font-size increase"
16993 \begin_layout Labeling
16994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16999 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
17001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17020 arg "font-size decrease"
17026 \begin_layout Standard
17032 don't go crazy with this feature.
17033 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17035 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
17037 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17041 \begin_layout Standard
17042 Another combo box allows to tweak
17049 \begin_layout Labeling
17050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17055 Alters the text color.
17056 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17062 which means that the document default color set in
17064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17065 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17071 \begin_inset space ~
17171 \begin_inset Index idx
17176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17178 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17195 \begin_layout Labeling
17196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17201 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
17202 Avoid using underlining if you can!
17203 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17204 when you could not change fonts.
17205 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17206 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17207 because some people
17211 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17216 \begin_layout Labeling
17217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17222 Don't use underlining.
17225 \begin_layout Labeling
17226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17233 This is text with Single underlining on.
17239 arg "font-underline"
17245 \begin_inset Newline newline
17251 \begin_layout Labeling
17252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17259 This is text with Double underlining on.
17265 arg "font-underunderline"
17271 \begin_layout Labeling
17272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17279 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
17285 arg "font-underwave"
17289 \begin_inset Newline newline
17292 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17293 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17297 \begin_layout Labeling
17298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17303 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17307 \begin_layout Labeling
17308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17313 Don't use strikethrough.
17316 \begin_layout Labeling
17317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17324 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
17330 arg "font-strikeout"
17334 \begin_inset Newline newline
17337 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
17340 \begin_layout Labeling
17341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17345 \begin_inset space ~
17352 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
17355 \begin_inset Newline newline
17358 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17363 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17366 \begin_layout Labeling
17367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17372 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17373 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17374 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
17375 \begin_inset Newline newline
17378 If you have for example,
17379 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17381 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17382 When using the spell checking (see section
17383 \begin_inset space ~
17387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17389 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17394 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17395 \begin_inset Newline newline
17398 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17401 Exclude from Spellchecking
17404 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17407 \begin_layout Standard
17408 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
17409 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17416 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17428 \begin_layout Itemize
17436 This is text with emphasize on
17441 \begin_layout Itemize
17449 This is text with Noun on.
17452 \begin_layout Standard
17453 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
17454 Once you have applied a text property via the
17457 arg "dialog-show character"
17463 arg "dialog-show character"
17467 the settings are temporarily saved.
17468 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
17471 arg "textstyle-apply"
17475 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
17476 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
17477 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17478 20) most recently applied settings,
17479 from which you can select one.
17482 \begin_layout Standard
17483 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default,
17494 from the menu of the toolbar button
17497 arg "textstyle-apply"
17504 \begin_layout Standard
17505 We conclude this section with the same warning once again:
17506 Do not overuse the fonts!
17508 more often than not,
17509 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17512 \begin_layout Section
17513 Printing and Previewing
17516 \begin_layout Subsection
17520 \begin_layout Standard
17521 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
17523 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17524 Before we tell you that,
17525 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
17526 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17528 Additional Features
17533 \begin_layout Standard
17535 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17538 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17539 typesetting system,
17540 but to prevent confusion,
17541 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17544 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17547 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17548 to turn your writing into printable output.
17549 This happens in two stages:
17552 \begin_layout Enumerate
17555 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17557 generating a file with the extension,
17559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17573 \begin_layout Enumerate
17576 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17577 to use the commands in the
17581 file to produce printable output.
17584 \begin_layout Subsection
17585 Output file formats
17586 \begin_inset Index idx
17591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17600 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17609 \begin_inset Index idx
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17633 \begin_layout Standard
17634 This file type has the extension
17635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17647 It contains your document as plain text in UTF-8 encoding.
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 You can export your document to plain text with the menu
17653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17654 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17656 \begin_inset space ~
17663 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17664 bibliography (section
17665 \begin_inset space ~
17669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17671 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17677 If your document includes such material,
17680 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17681 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17683 \begin_inset space ~
17687 \begin_inset space ~
17691 \begin_inset space ~
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17709 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to plain text.
17712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17715 \begin_inset Index idx
17720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17722 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17740 \begin_layout Standard
17741 This file type has the extension
17742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17753 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17754 program to process your document.
17755 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17757 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17758 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
17759 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17760 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17761 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 -file using the menu
17768 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17769 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17773 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17774 export variants are explained in section
17775 \begin_inset space ~
17779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17781 reference "subsec:Export"
17789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17791 \begin_inset Index idx
17796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 This file type has the extension
17817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 because it is completely portable;
17839 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17840 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17844 \begin_layout Standard
17845 DVI files do not contain images,
17846 they only link to them.
17847 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17848 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
17849 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
17850 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17853 \begin_layout Standard
17854 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17856 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17857 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17862 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17871 The latter option uses the program
17873 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17879 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17882 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17889 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17895 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17896 is still a work in progress,
17897 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17903 \begin_inset Index idx
17908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17927 \begin_layout Standard
17928 This file type has the extension
17929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17941 PostScript was developed by the company
17945 as a printer language.
17946 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17947 PostScript can be seen as a
17948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17951 programming language
17952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17956 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17961 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17962 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17968 \begin_inset Index idx
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17995 As a result of this,
17996 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17999 \begin_layout Standard
18000 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18004 Encapsulated PostScript
18005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18022 As \SpecialChar LyX
18023 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
18024 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
18028 \begin_inset space ~
18031 images in your document,
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18037 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18038 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18040 So if you plan to use PostScript,
18041 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
18044 \begin_layout Standard
18045 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18047 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18048 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18056 \begin_inset Index idx
18061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18063 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18078 \begin_inset Index idx
18083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18092 \begin_layout Standard
18093 This file type has the extension
18094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18110 Portable Document Format
18111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18118 was derived from PostScript.
18119 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18129 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
18132 \begin_layout Standard
18133 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18170 Portable Network Graphics
18171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18188 You can also use any other image format,
18189 because \SpecialChar LyX
18190 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
18191 But as described in the section about PostScript,
18192 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
18193 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18196 \begin_layout Standard
18197 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18199 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18205 \begin_layout Description
18207 \begin_inset space ~
18210 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18214 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18217 \begin_layout Description
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18226 ) This uses the program
18228 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18231 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18234 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18243 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18244 \begin_inset space ~
18248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18250 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18256 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18257 is still a work in progress,
18258 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
18262 \begin_layout Description
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18271 ) This uses the program
18276 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18282 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18283 \begin_inset space ~
18287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18289 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18295 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
18297 vertically written Japanese.
18300 \begin_layout Description
18302 \begin_inset space ~
18305 (cropped) This is the same as
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18313 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18314 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18315 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18318 \begin_layout Description
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18323 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18327 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
18330 \begin_layout Description
18332 \begin_inset space ~
18335 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18339 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18340 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18344 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18345 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18348 \begin_layout Standard
18352 \begin_inset space ~
18361 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
18364 and works without problems.
18365 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18366 or specific OpenType fonts,
18367 you might want to try out
18370 \begin_inset space ~
18378 \begin_inset space ~
18384 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
18391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18393 \begin_inset Index idx
18398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18415 \begin_inset Index idx
18420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18429 \begin_layout Standard
18430 This file type has the extension
18431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18443 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18444 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18445 When \SpecialChar LyX
18447 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
18448 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18454 between different formats,
18455 which are described in section
18457 Math Output in XHTML
18462 \begin_inset space ~
18470 \begin_layout Standard
18471 XHTML output remains
18472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18480 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18481 features are supported yet.
18485 and the World Wide Web
18490 Additional Features
18493 for more information.
18496 \begin_layout Standard
18497 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18499 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18500 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18506 \begin_layout Subsection
18508 \begin_inset Index idx
18513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18515 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18532 \begin_layout Standard
18533 To get a look at the final version of your document,
18534 with all of the page breaks in place,
18535 the footnotes correctly numbered,
18545 or use the toolbar button
18552 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
18553 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18554 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18560 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18565 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
18566 \begin_inset space ~
18570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18572 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18578 Further output formats can be selected via
18580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18581 View (Other Formats)
18583 or the toolbar button
18592 \begin_layout Standard
18593 If you have changed your document,
18594 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
18596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18602 Update (Other Formats)
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 When you preview a file,
18610 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18611 's temporary directory.
18612 To have a real output,
18613 export your document.
18616 \begin_layout Section
18617 A few Words about Typography
18618 \begin_inset Index idx
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_layout Subsection
18634 Dashes and Minus Signs
18635 \begin_inset Index idx
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 \begin_inset Index idx
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 \begin_layout Standard
18662 In \SpecialChar LyX
18665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18676 symbol comes in four variants:
18697 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18703 \begin_layout Standard
18704 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18714 height_special "totalheight"
18719 backgroundcolor "none"
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 \begin_inset Tabular
18724 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18725 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18726 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18727 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18728 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18729 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18759 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18798 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 system key combination
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 the en dash is entered with
18830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18839 and the em dash with
18842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18855 is the Mac label for the right
18865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18878 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18902 system key combination or
18903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18975 \begin_layout Standard
18976 Dashes can also be inserted with
18978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18980 \begin_inset space ~
18983 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18991 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
18994 \begin_layout Standard
18995 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
18996 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
18997 Here are some examples:
19000 \begin_layout Enumerate
19001 line- and page-breaks
19002 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19012 \begin_layout Enumerate
19015 \begin_inset space ~
19019 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19029 \begin_layout Enumerate
19030 The em dash is used without spaces:
19033 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19043 \begin_layout Enumerate
19044 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19048 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19058 \begin_layout Standard
19060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19062 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19063 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19071 \begin_layout Subsection
19072 Dashes and Line Breaks
19073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19075 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19082 \begin_layout Standard
19083 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
19085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19091 \begin_layout Itemize
19093 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
19094 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19097 \begin_layout Itemize
19099 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
19102 \begin_layout Itemize
19103 In French and Spanish,
19104 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
19105 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19108 \begin_layout Standard
19110 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19111 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19122 allows line breaks after hyphens and these en-dashes and em-dashes.
19125 \begin_layout Enumerate
19126 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19127 \begin_inset space ~
19130 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19132 The Elements of Typographic Style
19135 \begin_inset space ~
19138 – can be prevented using non-breaking spaces.
19141 \begin_layout Enumerate
19142 Unwanted line breaks
19146 dashes must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 Prevent Hyphenation
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19174 in \SpecialChar TeX
19176 a non-breaking space does not suffice.
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
19183 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
19192 \begin_layout Itemize
19194 \begin_inset space ~
19198 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19208 height_special "totalheight"
19213 backgroundcolor "none"
19216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 \begin_layout Itemize
19227 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19237 height_special "totalheight"
19242 backgroundcolor "none"
19245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19255 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19256 \begin_inset space ~
19259 – sont très utiles.
19262 \begin_layout Itemize
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19277 un inciso con rayas—
19282 \begin_layout Standard
19283 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19284 \begin_inset space ~
19287 – in contrast to an overfull line
19288 \begin_inset space ~
19291 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19295 \begin_layout Standard
19296 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
19297 you can select the option
19299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19300 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19301 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19302 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19307 \begin_layout Enumerate
19308 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19309 They can be prevented using non-breaking spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19315 \begin_layout Itemize
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19320 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19324 – sont très utiles.
19328 \begin_layout Enumerate
19329 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19330 \begin_inset Newline newline
19335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19336 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_layout Itemize
19352 Em-dashes without spaces—
19353 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19354 common in American English—
19355 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19356 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
19359 \begin_layout Standard
19360 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19367 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19379 \begin_layout Enumerate
19382 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19389 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19401 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19404 \begin_layout Standard
19405 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19407 \begin_inset space ~
19411 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19420 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19428 \begin_layout Standard
19429 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19431 \begin_inset space ~
19435 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19436 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
19438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19445 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
19450 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 The behavior was changed since
19460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19478 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
19479 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19487 \begin_layout Standard
19490 \begin_inset space ~
19498 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19500 \begin_inset space ~
19503 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19507 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19508 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19509 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19511 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19516 If you used both literal and
19517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19524 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19526 \begin_inset space ~
19530 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19533 \begin_layout Subsection
19535 \begin_inset Index idx
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19549 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19556 \begin_layout Standard
19557 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19558 but automatically in the output.
19559 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19565 \begin_inset Index idx
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 following the rules of the document language.
19589 does not hyphenate text in the
19593 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19596 \begin_layout Standard
19598 hyphenates almost perfectly;
19599 it only has problems with text in the
19603 font and with unusual constructs,
19605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19613 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19614 cannot break a word correctly,
19615 you can set hyphenation points manually.
19616 This is done with the menu
19618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19619 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19621 \begin_inset space ~
19627 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
19628 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
19631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19638 that are common in word processors,
19639 these added hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19641 If no hyphenation is necessary or the automatic hyphenation is disabled,
19646 \begin_layout Standard
19647 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
19648 does not hyphenate correctly,
19649 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
19650 how to hyphenate it by adding the command
19651 \begin_inset Flex Code
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19662 to the preamble which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen,
19664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19669 \begin_inset Flex Code
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion dis-quo-ta-tions}
19680 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
19682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19687 \begin_inset Flex Code
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 hyphenation{unbroken}
19699 If there are a lot of these hyphenation exceptions,
19700 you can collect them in a single file (say,
19702 \begin_inset Flex Code
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 ) and then import the file via:
19713 \begin_inset Flex Code
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 usepackage{myhyphens}
19725 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
19726 can find it (see the section
19728 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
19738 \begin_layout Standard
19740 \begin_inset Flex Code
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19751 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
19752 this is usually the main language of the document).
19753 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
19754 the language packages
19762 provide specific variants of the command:
19765 \begin_layout Itemize
19772 \begin_inset Flex Code
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
19789 \begin_layout Itemize
19796 \begin_inset Flex Code
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
19810 \begin_layout Standard
19812 depending on which language package you are using:
19815 \begin_layout Itemize
19816 \begin_inset Flex Code
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
19823 \begin_inset Newline newline
19826 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
19834 \begin_layout Itemize
19835 \begin_inset Flex Code
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
19849 \begin_layout Standard
19850 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
19854 \begin_layout Itemize
19855 \begin_inset Flex Code
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
19869 \begin_layout Itemize
19870 \begin_inset Flex Code
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19876 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
19884 \begin_layout Standard
19885 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
19888 \begin_layout Standard
19889 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
19890 which is usually after the user preamble.
19891 So it is advised that you embrace them in
19892 \begin_inset Flex Code
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
19905 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19909 \begin_layout Standard
19910 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19911 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
19912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19921 would then see the hyphen
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19929 as a line break possibility.
19930 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19931 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
19932 you can use a non-breaking hyphen (
19934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19935 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19936 Non-Breaking Hyphen
19938 ) or put it into a makebox as described in the section
19940 Prevent Hyphenation
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_layout Subsection
19955 \begin_inset Index idx
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19970 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19973 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19980 \begin_layout Standard
19981 When \SpecialChar LyX
19982 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19983 to generate the final version of your document,
19985 automatically distinguishes between words,
19990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19993 appropriate amount of space.
19994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19997 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
19998 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
20001 \begin_layout Standard
20003 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
20005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20016 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
20017 it's the end of a sentence;
20018 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
20019 it's an abbreviation.
20022 \begin_layout Standard
20023 Here are some examples of
20027 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20030 \begin_layout Itemize
20035 \begin_layout Itemize
20040 \begin_layout Standard
20041 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20044 \begin_layout Itemize
20046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20050 this is too much space!
20053 \begin_layout Itemize
20058 \begin_layout Standard
20059 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20062 \begin_layout Standard
20063 To fix this problem,
20064 use one of the following:
20067 \begin_layout Enumerate
20071 \begin_inset space ~
20076 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20083 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20089 \begin_inset Index idx
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 \begin_layout Enumerate
20117 \begin_inset space ~
20122 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20123 \begin_inset space ~
20127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20129 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20135 \begin_inset Index idx
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 \begin_layout Enumerate
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20167 \begin_inset space ~
20171 \begin_inset space ~
20178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20180 \begin_inset space ~
20185 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20186 This function is also bound to
20189 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20195 \begin_layout Standard
20196 With the corrections,
20197 our earlier examples look like this:
20200 \begin_layout Itemize
20202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20206 \begin_inset space \space{}
20209 this is too much space!
20212 \begin_layout Itemize
20213 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20217 \begin_layout Standard
20218 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20219 If your language is such a language,
20220 you don't need to worry,
20221 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20222 will take care of this.
20225 \begin_layout Standard
20226 For those that do need to bother,
20227 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20231 \begin_inset space ~
20237 feature described in the section
20239 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20244 Additional Features
20249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20251 \begin_inset Index idx
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 \begin_inset Index idx
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 \begin_layout Standard
20299 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20301 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
20302 and use a closing mark at the end.
20305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20313 The keyboard character,
20319 generates this automatically.
20322 \begin_layout Standard
20323 You can specify what character the
20327 key produces by using the submenu
20333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20337 \begin_inset Index idx
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 dialog and switching the
20362 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20363 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20371 \begin_layout Labeling
20372 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20384 \begin_inset space ~
20388 \begin_inset space ~
20392 \begin_inset Quotes els
20396 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20410 \begin_inset Quotes els
20414 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20417 quotation marks (as common,
20419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20426 \begin_layout Labeling
20427 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20430 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20434 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20438 \begin_inset space ~
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20446 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20450 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20456 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20460 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20464 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20468 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20471 quotation marks (as common,
20473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20480 \begin_layout Labeling
20481 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20484 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20488 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20492 \begin_inset space ~
20496 \begin_inset space ~
20500 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20504 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20510 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20514 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20518 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20522 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20525 quotation marks (as common,
20527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20534 \begin_layout Labeling
20535 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20538 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20542 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20546 \begin_inset space ~
20550 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20558 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20564 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20568 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20572 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20576 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20579 quotation marks (as common,
20581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20588 \begin_layout Labeling
20589 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20592 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20596 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20604 \begin_inset space ~
20608 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20612 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20618 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20622 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20626 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20630 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20633 quotation marks (as common,
20635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20642 \begin_layout Labeling
20643 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20646 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20650 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20654 \begin_inset space ~
20658 \begin_inset space ~
20662 \begin_inset Quotes als
20666 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20672 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20676 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20680 \begin_inset Quotes als
20684 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20687 quotation marks (as common,
20689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20696 \begin_layout Labeling
20697 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20700 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20704 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20708 \begin_inset space ~
20712 \begin_inset space ~
20716 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20720 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20726 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20730 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20734 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20738 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20741 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20744 \begin_layout Labeling
20745 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20748 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20752 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20756 \begin_inset space ~
20760 \begin_inset space ~
20764 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20768 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20774 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20778 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20782 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20786 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20789 quotation marks (as common,
20791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20798 \begin_layout Labeling
20799 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20802 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20806 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20810 \begin_inset space ~
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20818 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20822 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20828 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20832 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20836 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20840 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20843 quotation marks (as common,
20845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20852 \begin_layout Labeling
20853 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20856 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20860 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20864 \begin_inset space ~
20868 \begin_inset space ~
20872 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20876 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20882 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20886 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20890 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20894 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20897 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20903 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20904 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
20912 \begin_layout Labeling
20913 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20916 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20920 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20924 \begin_inset space ~
20928 \begin_inset space ~
20932 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20936 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20942 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20946 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20950 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20954 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20957 quotation marks (as common,
20959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20966 \begin_layout Labeling
20967 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20970 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20974 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20978 \begin_inset space ~
20982 \begin_inset space ~
20986 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20990 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20996 \begin_inset Quotes wld
21000 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
21004 \begin_inset Quotes wls
21008 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21011 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
21014 \begin_layout Labeling
21015 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21018 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21022 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21026 \begin_inset space ~
21030 \begin_inset space ~
21034 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21038 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21046 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21054 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21062 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21070 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21075 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21078 \begin_layout Labeling
21079 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21080 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21088 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21094 \begin_inset space ~
21098 \begin_inset space ~
21104 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21112 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21116 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21120 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21124 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21128 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21131 quotation marks (as common,
21133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21144 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21148 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21156 \begin_layout Labeling
21157 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21158 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21166 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21172 \begin_inset space ~
21176 \begin_inset space ~
21182 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21190 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21194 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21198 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21202 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21206 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21209 quotation marks (as common,
21211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21215 in North Korea and China)
21216 \begin_inset script superscript
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21221 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21237 \begin_layout Labeling
21238 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21241 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21245 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21249 \begin_inset space ~
21253 \begin_inset space ~
21257 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21261 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21267 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21273 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21279 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21285 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21290 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
21293 \begin_layout Standard
21294 Inner quotation marks
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 In many writing cultures,
21300 these are single quotation marks.
21301 But as the British and French styles show,
21302 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
21303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21310 does not necessarily mean
21311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21319 This is why we call them
21320 \begin_inset Quotes els
21324 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21340 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
21342 \begin_inset Quotes els
21346 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21349 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21352 arg "quote-insert inner"
21357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21363 \begin_layout Standard
21365 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21367 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
21368 even if the document-wide style changes.
21369 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21370 If you check the setting
21372 Use dynamic quotation marks
21376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21377 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21382 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21383 they appear in a special color).
21384 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21385 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
21386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21390 if your publisher requests a different style).
21393 \begin_layout Standard
21394 Individual quotation marks (i.
21395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21399 their level [inner,
21403 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
21406 \begin_layout Subsection
21408 \begin_inset Index idx
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_inset Index idx
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21454 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21461 \begin_layout Standard
21462 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
21463 These groups are known as
21468 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21469 knows about ligatures,
21470 your documents will contain them too in the output.
21471 Here are the standard ligatures:
21474 \begin_layout Itemize
21478 \begin_layout Itemize
21482 \begin_layout Itemize
21486 \begin_layout Itemize
21490 \begin_layout Itemize
21494 \begin_layout Standard
21495 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21498 \begin_layout Standard
21500 you don't want a ligature in a word.
21501 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21510 it looks really weird in compound words,
21512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21527 To break a ligature,
21530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21533 \begin_inset space ~
21540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21551 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21568 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21576 \begin_layout Subsection
21578 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21580 \begin_inset Index idx
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 \begin_layout Standard
21608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21609 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21614 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21617 \begin_layout Description
21619 The name of the game.
21622 \begin_layout Description
21624 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21628 \begin_layout Description
21630 The \SpecialChar TeX
21631 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21635 \begin_layout Description
21636 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21637 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21642 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21648 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21656 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21657 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21658 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21659 converges to the number
21660 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21664 The actual version is
21665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21674 the previous one was
21675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21686 \begin_layout Subsection
21688 \begin_inset Index idx
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 \begin_layout Standard
21713 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
21714 As you can see in the example below,
21715 it looks better when the space is smaller.
21717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21724 for units use the menu
21726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21727 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21729 \begin_inset space ~
21737 arg "space-insert thin"
21743 \begin_layout Standard
21744 Here is an example to show the differences:
21747 \begin_layout Standard
21748 \begin_inset Tabular
21749 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21750 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21751 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 \begin_inset space ~
21763 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 space between number and unit
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21791 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 half space between number and unit
21816 \begin_layout Subsection
21818 \begin_inset Index idx
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 \begin_layout Standard
21843 In the early days of word processors,
21844 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
21845 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21846 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
21847 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
21848 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21849 These bits of text became known as
21860 \begin_layout Standard
21863 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21864 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21865 But what about widows and orphans,
21866 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
21867 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21868 governing page breaks,
21869 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
21870 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
21871 you can add the commands
21872 \begin_inset Newline newline
21880 \begin_inset Newline newline
21888 \begin_inset Newline newline
21891 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21892 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21893 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21895 \begin_inset space ~
21899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21901 key "latexcompanion"
21907 \begin_inset space ~
21911 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21918 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21919 's page break mechanism.
21922 \begin_layout Chapter
21926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21928 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21935 \begin_layout Standard
21936 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21939 \begin_inset space ~
21945 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21948 \begin_layout Section
21950 \begin_inset Index idx
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21973 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21976 \begin_layout Description
21979 \begin_inset space ~
21982 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21983 \begin_inset Newline newline
21987 \begin_inset Note Note
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21999 \begin_layout Description
22000 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
22001 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
22004 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22005 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
22007 \begin_inset space ~
22013 \begin_inset Newline newline
22017 \begin_inset Note Comment
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
22030 \begin_layout Description
22032 \begin_inset space ~
22035 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
22037 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
22039 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset Newline newline
22049 \begin_inset Newline newline
22053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
22063 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
22068 of a comment that appears in the output.
22074 \begin_inset Newline newline
22078 \begin_inset Newline newline
22081 As you can see in the example,
22082 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
22085 \begin_layout Standard
22086 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
22094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22098 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
22101 \begin_layout Section
22103 \begin_inset Index idx
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22117 name "sec:Footnotes"
22124 \begin_layout Standard
22126 uses boxes to display footnotes:
22127 When you insert a footnote using the menu
22129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22132 or the toolbar button
22135 arg "footnote-insert"
22149 \begin_inset Graphics
22150 filename clipart/footnote.png
22159 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22160 's representation of your footnote.
22170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22194 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22195 Clicking on the box label again will close
22208 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
22209 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
22224 \begin_layout Standard
22225 Here is an example footnote:
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 To close a footnote,
22235 click on the footnote box label.
22243 \begin_layout Standard
22244 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
22245 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22246 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22247 according to the document class.
22249 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
22250 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22256 ey are described in the
22259 \begin_inset space ~
22267 \begin_layout Section
22269 \begin_inset Index idx
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22283 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22290 \begin_layout Standard
22291 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22293 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22297 \begin_inset space ~
22302 or the toolbar button
22305 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22332 appearing within your text.
22333 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22334 's representation of your margin
22343 \begin_layout Standard
22344 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22348 \begin_inset Marginal
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 This is a marginal note.
22361 \begin_layout Standard
22362 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22363 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
22364 right on odd pages.
22367 \begin_layout Standard
22368 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22371 \begin_inset space ~
22379 \begin_inset space ~
22387 \begin_layout Section
22388 Graphics and Images
22389 \begin_inset Index idx
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 \begin_inset Index idx
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22415 name "sec:Graphics"
22422 \begin_layout Standard
22423 To insert an image in your document,
22424 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
22427 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22436 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22439 \begin_layout Standard
22440 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22445 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22446 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
22447 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22448 \begin_inset space ~
22452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22454 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22462 \begin_layout Standard
22467 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
22468 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22471 \begin_inset space ~
22475 \begin_inset space ~
22484 \begin_inset space ~
22488 \begin_inset space ~
22492 \begin_inset space ~
22497 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22498 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
22505 \begin_layout Standard
22509 \begin_inset space ~
22513 \begin_inset space ~
22518 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22519 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22521 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22526 \begin_inset space ~
22531 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
22532 only a frame with the image size is printed.
22535 \begin_layout Standard
22536 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22537 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
22538 This is an example image within a separate,
22539 horizontally centered paragraph:
22542 \begin_layout Standard
22544 \begin_inset Graphics
22545 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22553 \begin_layout Standard
22554 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
22555 you have to put the image into a float,
22557 \begin_inset space ~
22561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22563 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22571 \begin_layout Subsection
22573 \begin_inset Index idx
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22597 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22604 \begin_layout Standard
22605 You can insert images
22606 \change_inserted 5863208 1701369912
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 \change_inserted 5863208 1701371417
22614 Apart from static images specific scripts generating images can be used as well.
22615 For example one can use Gnuplot script (files with
22616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22639 extension) instead of image filename.
22648 in any known file format.
22649 But as we explained in section
22650 \begin_inset space ~
22654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22656 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22662 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22664 therefore uses the program
22668 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22669 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22670 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22671 \begin_inset space ~
22675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22677 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22686 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22689 \begin_layout Description
22691 \begin_inset space ~
22694 images consist of pixel values,
22695 often in a compressed form.
22696 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22697 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22701 Graphics Interchange Format
22702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22719 \begin_inset Index idx
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22745 Portable Network Graphics
22746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22763 \begin_inset Index idx
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22789 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22819 \begin_inset Index idx
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22843 \begin_layout Description
22845 \begin_inset space ~
22848 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
22849 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
22850 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22851 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22852 \begin_inset Newline newline
22855 Scalable image formats can be
22856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22859 Scalable Vector Graphics
22860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22877 \begin_inset Index idx
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22903 Encapsulated PostScript
22904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22921 \begin_inset Index idx
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22947 Portable Document Format
22948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22965 \begin_inset Index idx
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22986 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
22987 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22992 In the case of PDF,
22993 the original image is additionally compressed.
23001 \begin_layout Standard
23002 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
23010 \begin_layout Subsection
23011 Grouping of Image Settings
23012 \begin_inset Index idx
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 \begin_layout Standard
23037 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
23038 Images within such a group share their settings,
23039 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
23040 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
23043 \begin_layout Standard
23044 A new group can be set by pressing the button
23047 \begin_inset space ~
23051 \begin_inset space ~
23063 \begin_inset space ~
23067 \begin_inset space ~
23073 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
23076 \begin_layout Section
23078 \begin_inset Index idx
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23099 \begin_layout Standard
23100 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
23103 arg "tabular-insert"
23108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23112 A dialog will appear,
23113 asking you for the number of rows and columns,
23114 and you can select a specific (border) style.
23115 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
23116 This separation appears due to a double line:
23117 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
23118 Here is an example table:
23121 \begin_layout Standard
23123 \begin_inset Tabular
23124 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
23125 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23128 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 \begin_layout Standard
23326 This corresponds to the
23327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23334 table style listed in the style selection.
23337 \begin_layout Standard
23338 Other available styles include:
23341 \begin_layout Itemize
23343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23350 which looks line the above table,
23351 but without the first row being separated via double line,
23354 \begin_layout Itemize
23355 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23358 \begin_layout Itemize
23360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23367 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
23377 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
23380 \begin_layout Standard
23381 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
23383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23384 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23388 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
23389 you should alter this setting.
23392 \begin_layout Subsection
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
23399 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23403 This brings up the table dialog.
23404 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
23405 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
23406 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23407 This means that if you select more cells,
23408 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
23411 \begin_layout Standard
23412 In addition to the table dialog,
23416 \begin_inset space ~
23421 helps you in setting table properties.
23422 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23425 \begin_layout Standard
23429 \begin_inset space ~
23434 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23435 If you add a row or column,
23436 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
23437 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
23438 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
23440 \begin_inset space ~
23444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23446 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
23464 This will merge the cells to
23469 spread over more than one column/row.
23470 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
23471 so that the alignment,
23473 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23474 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
23477 \begin_layout Standard
23479 \begin_inset Tabular
23480 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23481 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23482 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23483 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23484 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23485 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23581 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23617 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23618 -arguments for the table.
23619 They are necessary for special table formatting,
23620 such as the multirow cells,
23621 explained in the chapter
23628 \begin_inset space ~
23634 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23635 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23636 but are visible in the output.
23639 \begin_layout Standard
23640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 Most DVI-viewers are
23653 able to display rotations.
23661 \begin_layout Standard
23666 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23671 adds lines for all cell borders.
23674 \begin_layout Subsection
23676 \begin_inset Index idx
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 \begin_inset Index idx
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 \begin_layout Standard
23713 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
23714 you can use the option
23717 \begin_inset space ~
23721 \begin_inset space ~
23729 \begin_inset space ~
23734 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23735 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23738 \begin_layout Description
23744 The current row and all rows above,
23745 that don't have any special options defined,
23746 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23747 Except for the first page,
23751 \begin_inset space ~
23759 \begin_layout Description
23763 \begin_inset space ~
23769 The current row and all rows above,
23770 that don't have any special options defined,
23771 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23774 \begin_layout Description
23780 The current row and all rows below,
23781 that don't have any special options defined,
23782 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23783 except for the last page,
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23795 \begin_layout Description
23799 \begin_inset space ~
23805 The current row and all rows below,
23806 that don't have any special options defined,
23807 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23810 \begin_layout Description
23812 The first row is reset as a single column.
23813 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23819 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23822 \begin_inset space ~
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23831 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23832 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
23833 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
23834 the others will be defined as
23840 first means first in this order:
23845 \begin_inset space ~
23859 \begin_inset space ~
23865 see the following longtable to see how it works:
23868 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset Tabular
23871 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23872 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23873 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23874 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23875 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23876 <row endfirsthead="true">
23877 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23888 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <row endfirsthead="true">
23908 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23919 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 <row endhead="true">
23941 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <row endhead="true">
23972 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <row endfoot="true">
24005 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25988 <row endlastfoot="true">
25989 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26000 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26009 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26026 \begin_layout Subsection
26028 \begin_inset Index idx
26033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26052 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 A table cell can contain text,
26064 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
26065 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
26066 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
26072 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
26077 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
26078 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
26082 \begin_layout Standard
26084 \begin_inset Tabular
26085 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
26086 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26088 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
26089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26109 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26178 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26234 This is longer now.
26239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26290 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26291 This is longer now.
26296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26323 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26324 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26329 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26334 Selection with the mouse or with
26338 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26339 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
26342 \begin_layout Section
26344 \begin_inset Index idx
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26365 \begin_layout Subsection
26369 \begin_layout Standard
26370 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
26371 which doesn't have a fixed location.
26373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26380 forward or backward a page or two,
26381 to wherever it fits best.
26389 \begin_inset space ~
26395 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
26398 \begin_layout Standard
26399 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26400 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
26401 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
26402 every float can be referenced in the text.
26403 Floats are therefore numbered.
26404 Referencing is described in section
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26411 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26419 \begin_layout Standard
26423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26427 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26428 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
26429 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26430 \begin_inset Index idx
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
26452 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26453 -document readable,
26454 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
26455 A closed float box looks like this:
26457 \begin_inset Graphics
26458 filename clipart/float.png
26463 – a gray button with a red label.
26466 \begin_layout Standard
26467 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26468 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26471 \begin_layout Subsection
26473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26475 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26480 \begin_inset Index idx
26485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_layout Standard
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26512 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26517 was created using the menu
26519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26520 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26526 arg "float-insert figure"
26530 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
26532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26538 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26542 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26546 \begin_inset space ~
26554 arg "layout-paragraph"
26560 \begin_layout Standard
26561 \begin_inset Float figure
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26570 \begin_inset Graphics
26571 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26581 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26586 name "fig:A-star-in"
26603 \begin_layout Standard
26604 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
26605 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26616 ) and refer to it using the menu
26618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26624 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26628 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
26629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26638 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26639 will reposition the floats in the final document,
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26649 For more about cross-references,
26651 \begin_inset space ~
26655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26657 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26665 \begin_layout Standard
26666 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
26667 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26668 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26669 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
26670 \begin_inset space ~
26674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26676 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26683 \begin_inset space ~
26687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26689 reference "fig:Two-images"
26694 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26695 You can also set the images one below the other.
26697 \begin_inset space ~
26701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26703 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26711 reference "fig:Star"
26716 are the subfigures.
26719 \begin_layout Standard
26720 \begin_inset Float figure
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26732 \begin_inset Float figure
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26745 name "fig:Undefinable"
26757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 \begin_inset Graphics
26759 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26771 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26775 \begin_inset Float figure
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26783 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 \begin_inset Graphics
26802 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26814 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26826 name "fig:Two-images"
26843 \begin_layout Subsection
26845 \begin_inset Index idx
26850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 \begin_layout Standard
26870 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26873 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26876 or the toolbar button
26879 arg "float-insert table"
26883 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26885 \begin_inset space ~
26889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26891 reference "tab:Table-float"
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26900 \begin_inset Float table
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26908 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26913 name "tab:Table-float"
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 \begin_inset Tabular
26928 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26929 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26930 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
27067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27083 \end{array}\right]$
27091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27104 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
27125 \begin_layout Subsection
27127 \begin_inset Index idx
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 \begin_layout Standard
27153 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
27154 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
27155 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
27156 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
27163 \begin_inset space ~
27171 \begin_layout Section
27173 \begin_inset Index idx
27178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27187 \begin_layout Standard
27189 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
27192 all the usual rules of indentation,
27195 \begin_inset space \space{}
27201 \begin_layout Standard
27202 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
27203 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
27205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27209 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
27212 \begin_layout Standard
27214 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27224 height_special "totalheight"
27229 backgroundcolor "none"
27232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 This is a minipage.
27236 The text is set in an italic style.
27239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27242 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
27250 \begin_layout Standard
27251 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27254 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
27259 as described in section
27260 \begin_inset space ~
27264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27266 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27272 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27279 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27289 height_special "totalheight"
27294 backgroundcolor "none"
27297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27298 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27299 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27305 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27309 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27319 height_special "totalheight"
27324 backgroundcolor "none"
27327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27329 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27337 \begin_layout Standard
27338 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 When you right-click on a minipage box,
27346 you can transform the box to another box type.
27347 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27354 \begin_inset space ~
27362 \begin_layout Chapter
27363 Mathematical Formulas
27364 \begin_inset Index idx
27369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27376 \begin_inset Index idx
27381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27383 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
27386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27400 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27407 \begin_layout Standard
27408 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27413 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27416 \begin_layout Section
27418 \begin_inset Index idx
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27442 \begin_layout Standard
27443 To create a math formula,
27444 you can just click on the toolbar icon
27457 That will create a little blue rectangle,
27458 with purple markers around its corners.
27459 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
27460 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27461 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27469 \begin_layout Standard
27470 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
27473 \begin_inset space ~
27479 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27482 \begin_layout Standard
27483 There are two main types of formulas,
27484 inline formulas and display formulas.
27485 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
27489 \begin_layout Standard
27490 This is a line with an inline formula
27491 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27497 \begin_layout Standard
27498 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
27500 \begin_inset Formula
27507 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27510 \begin_layout Standard
27512 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27530 followed by a space,
27531 in a formula will create the Greek letter
27532 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27536 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27539 \begin_inset space ~
27547 \begin_layout Subsection
27548 Navigating in Formulas
27549 \begin_inset Index idx
27554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27573 \begin_layout Standard
27574 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
27576 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27577 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27582 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27583 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27588 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27593 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27596 \end{array}\right]$
27604 will leave the formula,
27605 placing the cursor after the formula.
27610 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
27612 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27615 \begin_layout Standard
27621 printed in this document as
27622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27626 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27634 seems to do nothing in a formula,
27635 since it does not add a space between characters,
27636 but it does exit a nested structure.
27638 you have to be careful about using
27645 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27654 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27664 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27668 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27674 since in the latter case only the
27677 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27682 will be under the square root sign:
27684 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 You can leave many parts of a formula,
27693 partially filled in,
27695 \begin_inset Formula
27697 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27706 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
27707 or a subscript with nothing in it,
27708 the results will be unpredictable,
27709 but most constructs don't mind.
27712 \begin_layout Subsection
27716 \begin_layout Standard
27717 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27718 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
27723 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27724 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27726 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27727 That text can then be cut or copied,
27728 and then pasted within any formula,
27729 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27733 \begin_layout Subsection
27734 Exponents and Subscripts
27735 \begin_inset Index idx
27740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27742 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27757 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27764 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 \begin_layout Standard
27782 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27785 arg "math-superscript"
27791 arg "math-subscript"
27795 but it is often much easier to use a command.
27797 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27804 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27814 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27821 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27826 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27833 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27839 If you use characters in the superscript,
27840 that could be accented with the circumflex
27841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27849 you have to use an extra
27853 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27856 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27863 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27869 Subscripts are similar:
27871 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27878 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27886 \begin_layout Subsection
27888 \begin_inset Index idx
27893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27895 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27913 Create a fraction either with the command
27919 or by using the icon
27922 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27928 \begin_inset space ~
27934 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27935 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27936 To move it to the bottom,
27948 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
27949 as this example shows:
27950 \begin_inset Formula
27952 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27955 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27963 \begin_layout Subsection
27965 \begin_inset Index idx
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 Roots can be created using the
27993 \begin_inset space ~
28001 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
28007 arg "math-insert \\root"
28029 you can produce roots of higher orders,
28037 always produces a square root.
28040 \begin_layout Subsection
28041 Operators with Limits
28042 \begin_inset Index idx
28047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28064 \begin_inset Index idx
28069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28088 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28097 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
28101 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
28104 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
28105 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28106 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
28107 directly after the symbol.
28108 The sum operator will automatically place its
28109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28116 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
28117 and to the side in inline formulas,
28119 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
28124 \begin_inset Formula
28126 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
28133 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
28136 \begin_layout Standard
28137 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
28138 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
28140 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28141 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28143 \begin_inset space ~
28147 \begin_inset space ~
28161 \begin_layout Standard
28162 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
28163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28172 \begin_inset Index idx
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 \begin_inset Formula
28196 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
28201 which will place the
28202 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
28206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28214 In inline formulas it looks like this:
28216 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
28230 Have a look at section
28231 \begin_inset space ~
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28237 reference "subsec:Functions"
28242 for an explanation of function macros.
28245 \begin_layout Subsection
28247 \begin_inset Index idx
28252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28254 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28271 \begin_layout Standard
28272 Most math symbols can be found in the
28275 \begin_inset space ~
28280 under one of several categories;
28301 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28305 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28306 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
28307 you don't have to use the
28310 \begin_inset space ~
28316 you can type the command directly into the formula.
28318 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
28321 \begin_layout Subsection
28323 \begin_inset Index idx
28328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 \begin_layout Standard
28348 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28354 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
28360 \begin_inset space ~
28368 arg "math-insert \\space"
28372 This generates a small space,
28373 and shows a small marker on the screen.
28381 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
28384 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28386 \begin_inset Graphics
28387 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
28392 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
28393 With every space enter the size will be changed.
28394 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
28396 because they are negative spaces.
28397 Here are two examples:
28400 \begin_layout Standard
28411 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
28417 \begin_layout Standard
28428 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28434 \begin_layout Subsection
28436 \begin_inset Index idx
28441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28460 name "subsec:Functions"
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28471 \begin_inset space ~
28476 contains under the button
28479 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28482 a number of function macros,
28484 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28489 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28498 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28505 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
28507 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28511 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28520 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28524 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28530 \begin_layout Standard
28531 For some mathematical objects,
28533 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
28534 as described in section
28535 \begin_inset space ~
28539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28541 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28549 \begin_layout Subsection
28551 \begin_inset Index idx
28556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
28577 This may depend on your keyboard,
28578 or the bindings file you use.
28579 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28583 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28586 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28587 Our example is entered by typing
28592 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28599 \begin_inset space ~
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28605 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28610 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 \begin_inset Float table
28621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28622 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28627 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28631 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 \begin_inset Tabular
28642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28643 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28784 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28892 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28946 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29000 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
29010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29108 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
29118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29162 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
29172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29207 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29229 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
29232 \begin_inset space ~
29240 arg "math-insert \\hat"
29244 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
29247 \begin_layout Section
29248 Brackets and Delimiters
29249 \begin_inset Index idx
29254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 \begin_inset Index idx
29276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29295 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29303 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
29306 using just the keys
29311 But if you want to surround a large structure,
29312 like a matrix or a fraction,
29313 or if you have several layers of brackets,
29314 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
29317 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29322 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
29323 \begin_inset Formula
29325 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
29333 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
29335 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
29338 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29341 and the expression on the right was entered using the
29347 \begin_inset Formula
29349 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
29357 \begin_layout Standard
29358 If you use the delimiter icon,
29360 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
29365 If you use the option
29368 \begin_inset space ~
29374 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
29375 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
29377 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
29383 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
29384 with a dotted line,
29385 but nothing will be printed.
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29389 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
29390 like a square root,
29391 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
29392 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
29397 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
29400 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
29402 to insert a pair of parentheses,
29403 select the structure and enter
29406 arg "math-delim ( )"
29412 \begin_layout Section
29413 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
29414 \begin_inset Index idx
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29421 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29436 \begin_inset Index idx
29441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 \begin_inset Index idx
29463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29469 Multi-line Equations
29482 \begin_layout Standard
29483 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29487 \begin_inset space ~
29495 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
29499 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
29500 Here is an example:
29501 \begin_inset Formula
29503 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29512 The parentheses aren't automatic,
29513 but you can add them as described in section
29514 \begin_inset space ~
29518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29520 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29526 When you construct the matrix,
29527 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
29529 or center-justified.
29530 This alignment is set in the box
29535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 for every column as default.
29589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29600 means that the first column will be left-justified,
29601 the second will be centered,
29602 and the third column will be right-justified,
29603 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
29604 The result will look like this:
29605 \begin_inset Formula
29608 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29609 column & has & has\,right\\
29610 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29620 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29623 arg "newline-insert newline"
29626 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29627 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29632 or the math toolbar.
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29636 There are other arrays used in formulas,
29637 such as distinctions of cases.
29638 It can be created with the menu
29640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29641 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29643 \begin_inset space ~
29655 Here is an example:
29657 \begin_inset Formula
29671 \begin_layout Standard
29672 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29675 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29678 arg "newline-insert newline"
29682 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
29683 one for each column.
29687 arg "newline-insert newline"
29690 in a non-empty formula,
29691 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29699 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
29700 the relation sign is in the second column,
29701 and the rest in the third column.
29702 A new row is created by every further entry of
29705 arg "newline-insert newline"
29709 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29710 Here is an example:
29711 \begin_inset Formula
29713 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29714 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29719 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29720 \begin_inset Formula
29722 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29731 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29738 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29739 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29742 reference "eq:asquared"
29748 The other types are described in section
29749 \begin_inset space ~
29753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29755 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29763 \begin_layout Section
29764 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29765 \begin_inset Index idx
29770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29772 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29787 \begin_inset Index idx
29792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29798 Referencing formulas
29809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29811 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29818 \begin_layout Standard
29819 To number a formula,
29820 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29822 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29823 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29825 \begin_inset space ~
29829 \begin_inset space ~
29837 arg "math-number-toggle"
29841 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29842 within parentheses.
29843 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29844 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
29845 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29846 separated by a dot:
29847 \begin_inset Formula
29857 arg "math-number-toggle"
29860 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29861 You can only number displayed formulas.
29864 \begin_layout Standard
29865 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
29868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29869 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29871 \begin_inset space ~
29875 \begin_inset space ~
29883 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29886 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29887 \begin_inset Formula
29890 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29896 To number all lines use the shortcut
29899 arg "math-number-toggle"
29905 \begin_layout Standard
29906 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29909 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29910 A label is inserted with the menu
29912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29921 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29922 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29923 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29935 as the first part of the label,
29936 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
29937 We inserted in the following example the label
29938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29945 in the second line:
29946 \begin_inset Formula
29948 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29949 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29954 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29955 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29956 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29960 \begin_inset space ~
29968 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29972 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29973 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29974 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29981 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29991 's cross-reference box are described in section
29992 \begin_inset space ~
29996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29998 reference "sec:Cross-References"
30005 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
30012 \begin_layout Section
30013 User defined math macros
30014 \begin_inset Index idx
30019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30038 \begin_layout Standard
30040 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30041 Math macros are explained in section
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30056 \begin_layout Section
30060 \begin_layout Subsection
30062 \begin_inset Index idx
30067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30087 The standard font for text is italic,
30088 for numbers the standard is roman.
30089 To set a font in a formula,
30093 \begin_inset space ~
30101 arg "math-insert \\font"
30105 or enter its command,
30107 \begin_inset space ~
30111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30113 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30123 \begin_inset Float table
30130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30131 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30136 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30140 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
30148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30150 \begin_inset Tabular
30151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
30152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30186 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
30194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30213 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
30221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30240 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
30248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
30281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30300 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
30308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30327 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
30335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30354 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
30362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
30396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30422 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
30430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30449 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
30457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30483 \begin_layout Standard
30484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30493 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30516 When you use a typeface,
30517 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
30518 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
30523 within the box will set the cursor outside,
30524 so that you have to use a non-breaking space when you need a space in the box.
30525 Here is an example where
30526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30537 denotes the set of numbers:
30538 \begin_inset Formula
30540 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 The typefaces are nestable,
30550 which can cause confusion.
30563 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
30567 \begin_inset Newline newline
30570 So it is better not to use this feature.
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30574 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
30576 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30580 \begin_inset Newline newline
30583 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30590 which works like the other typeface commands:
30592 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30605 works for all symbols,
30610 \begin_layout Standard
30611 A number of other font options are available as well,
30614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30615 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30625 \begin_layout Subsection
30627 \begin_inset Index idx
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30634 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30652 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
30654 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
30655 which is obtained using the entry
30658 \begin_inset space ~
30662 \begin_inset space ~
30670 \begin_inset space ~
30678 arg "math-insert \\font"
30682 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30683 in black instead of blue.
30684 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30685 Here is an example:
30686 \begin_inset Formula
30689 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30690 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30699 \begin_layout Subsection
30701 \begin_inset Index idx
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30708 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30726 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
30727 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
30748 For most characters,
30757 are actually the same size,
30759 superscripts and subscripts,
30760 and certain other structures,
30766 Except for some operators,
30767 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
30768 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30769 thinks are appropriate.
30770 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30773 arg "math-insert \\style"
30777 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30780 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30784 which is normally in
30795 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30799 The four styles are used in the following example:
30802 \begin_layout Standard
30803 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30808 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30813 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30818 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30824 \begin_layout Standard
30825 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
30827 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30835 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30837 if the base font size of the document is changed,
30838 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
30839 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30850 \begin_layout Standard
30854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30860 \begin_layout Section
30861 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30863 \begin_inset Index idx
30868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30875 \begin_inset Index idx
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30882 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30901 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
30904 \begin_layout Subsection
30905 Enabling AMS-Support
30908 \begin_layout Standard
30909 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by setting
30923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30927 \begin_inset Index idx
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30934 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 \begin_inset space ~
30957 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
30958 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30959 -errors in formulas,
30960 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30963 \begin_layout Subsection
30965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30967 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30972 \begin_inset Index idx
30977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 Multi-line Equations
30996 \begin_layout Standard
30997 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30998 provides a selection of different formula types.
31000 allows you to choose between
31025 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
31027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31035 for an explanation of these formula types.
31038 \begin_layout Chapter
31042 \begin_layout Section
31044 \begin_inset Index idx
31049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31058 name "sec:Cross-References"
31065 \begin_layout Standard
31066 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31067 's strengths is cross-references.
31068 You can reference every section,
31072 and list in the document.
31073 To reference a document part,
31074 you have to insert a label into it.
31075 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31076 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31079 \begin_layout Enumerate
31083 \begin_layout Enumerate
31084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31086 name "enu:Second-item"
31093 \begin_layout Enumerate
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31098 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31103 or by pressing the toolbar button
31110 A gray label box like this:
31112 \begin_inset Graphics
31113 filename clipart/label.png
31117 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31119 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
31120 in our case the text
31121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31154 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
31156 if you insert a label into a section heading,
31157 the suggested prefix will be
31158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31172 \begin_layout Standard
31173 To reference the item,
31174 we refer to its label using the menu
31176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31179 or the toolbar button
31182 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31186 A gray cross-reference box like this:
31188 \begin_inset Graphics
31189 filename clipart/reference.png
31193 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
31194 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
31195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31207 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31211 As an alternative to
31213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31217 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
31222 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
31224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31237 Here is our cross-reference:
31239 \begin_inset space ~
31243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31245 reference "enu:Second-item"
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31254 It is recommended to use a non-breaking space
31258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 described in section
31260 \begin_inset space ~
31264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31266 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
31276 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
31279 \begin_layout Standard
31280 There are eight formats of cross-references:
31283 \begin_layout Description
31286 this is the default:
31288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31290 reference "fig:Two-images"
31298 \begin_layout Description
31300 prints the number within two parentheses,
31301 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
31302 especially when the reference name
31303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31314 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31322 \begin_layout Description
31324 prints the page number:
31326 \begin_inset space ~
31330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31331 LatexCommand pageref
31332 reference "fig:Two-images"
31340 \begin_layout Description
31342 \begin_inset space ~
31346 \begin_inset space ~
31350 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
31352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31353 LatexCommand vpageref
31354 reference "fig:Two-images"
31360 \begin_inset Newline newline
31363 If the label is on the same page,
31364 it prints “on this page”;
31365 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
31366 it prints “on the facing page”;
31367 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
31368 it prints “on the previous page”;
31369 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
31370 it prints “on the next page”.
31371 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
31374 \begin_layout Description
31376 \begin_inset space ~
31380 \begin_inset space ~
31384 \begin_inset space ~
31389 the text “on page” and the page number:
31391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31393 reference "fig:Two-images"
31399 \begin_inset Newline newline
31402 If the label is on the same page,
31403 this format behaves like
31410 otherwise it behaves like
31414 \begin_inset space ~
31418 \begin_inset space ~
31427 \begin_layout Description
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31433 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
31434 \begin_inset Newline newline
31438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31447 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31457 \begin_inset Index idx
31462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 \begin_inset Index idx
31485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31488 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31508 \begin_inset Newline newline
31511 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
31512 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
31514 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
31518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31527 is the default and preferred because
31531 supports only English documents.
31532 The format is specified by using the command
31536 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31545 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31546 preamble of the document.
31547 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
31548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31564 \begin_inset Newline newline
31571 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
31576 \begin_inset Newline newline
31587 predefines reference formats for all available types.
31588 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
31589 So if you want to make formatted references to,
31592 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
31598 you might do so as follows:
31599 \begin_inset Newline newline
31606 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31607 format{prop}{Proposition
31612 \begin_inset Newline newline
31615 For more information about defining formatted references,
31616 have a look at the package documentation
31617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31619 key "prettyref,refstyle"
31625 \begin_inset Newline newline
31636 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
31641 \begin_inset Newline newline
31644 If you activate the option
31646 Format cross-references in work area
31650 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
31653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31661 rather than just displaying the label.
31664 \begin_layout Description
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31670 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
31672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31673 LatexCommand nameref
31674 reference "fig:Two-images"
31682 \begin_layout Description
31684 \begin_inset space ~
31688 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31689 label for the reference:
31691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31692 LatexCommand labelonly
31693 reference "fig:Two-images"
31699 \begin_inset Newline newline
31702 This allows for customization,
31703 using \SpecialChar TeX
31705 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
31712 then you may want to use the
31715 \begin_inset space ~
31721 which will output only the part of the reference following the
31722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31730 This is the form needed for e.
31731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31735 \begin_inset space \space{}
31742 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31744 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31748 of the cross-reference window,
31749 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
31752 \begin_layout Standard
31753 You can only use the style
31757 to reference numbered document parts,
31758 while the reference style
31762 is always possible.
31765 \begin_layout Standard
31766 If you want to reference a section,
31767 put the label in the section heading;
31768 for floats put the label in the caption;
31769 for footnotes put the label in it.
31770 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31771 \begin_inset space ~
31775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31777 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31786 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31790 \begin_inset space ~
31794 \begin_inset space ~
31799 sets the cursor before the referenced label (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label).
31800 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31803 \begin_inset space ~
31808 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31809 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31812 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31819 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31820 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31827 You can change labels at any time.
31828 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to change them all manually.
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31832 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
31833 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31834 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 References are described in detail in the section
31849 \begin_layout Section
31850 Table of Contents and other Listings
31851 \begin_inset Index idx
31856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31863 \begin_inset Index idx
31868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31885 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31906 \begin_layout Subsection
31908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31910 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31917 \begin_layout Standard
31918 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31921 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31923 \begin_inset space ~
31927 \begin_inset space ~
31933 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31935 If you click on it,
31941 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
31942 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31943 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31945 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31947 \begin_inset space ~
31952 that is described in section
31953 \begin_inset space ~
31957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31959 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31967 \begin_layout Standard
31968 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31969 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
31970 as described in section
31971 \begin_inset space ~
31975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31977 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31983 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
31985 \begin_inset space ~
31989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31991 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
31996 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
31997 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
32000 \begin_layout Subsection
32003 Listings and Algorithms
32004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32006 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32016 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
32017 You can insert them via the
32019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32020 List/Contents/References
32023 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
32026 \begin_layout Section
32027 URLs and Hyperlinks
32028 \begin_inset Index idx
32033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32040 \begin_inset Index idx
32045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32054 \begin_layout Subsection
32056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32066 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32075 Here is an example URL:
32079 \begin_inset Flex URL
32082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32084 https://www.lyx.org
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32094 the URL text will always be in the style
32099 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
32101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32108 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32114 \begin_layout Standard
32138 (use whatever the current text font is).
32139 To have italicized URLs,
32143 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32156 URLs will break between lines at certain characters,
32160 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32171 \begin_layout Standard
32172 It does not break at a hyphen (
32177 but you can change that by adding
32183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32184 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32185 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
32186 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
32190 If this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
32191 a last resort is to put
32199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32204 this will cause URLs to be broken at every character.
32207 \begin_layout Standard
32208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 URLs must not end with a backslash,
32218 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32227 \begin_layout Subsection
32229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32231 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32244 or with the toolbar button
32251 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32261 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32262 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32266 name "LyX's homepage"
32267 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32273 an Email address like this:
32275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32277 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32278 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
32285 a link to a file or any other valid URI (such as
32294 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32303 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
32304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32315 to the link target,
32316 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons.
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32320 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
32321 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
32322 To set the format of the link text,
32323 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
32324 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
32329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32331 name "LyX's homepage"
32332 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32340 \begin_layout Standard
32341 The link text color can be changed,
32346 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
32348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32349 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32353 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
32354 \begin_inset Newline newline
32362 \begin_inset Newline newline
32369 in the PDF Properties dialog.
32372 \begin_layout Standard
32373 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
32374 you can use context menu (or directly via
32376 Ctrl + right mouse button
32381 \begin_layout Section
32383 \begin_inset Index idx
32388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32397 name "sec:Counters"
32404 \begin_layout Standard
32405 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32406 is its ability to manage counters.
32408 this is handled automatically,
32409 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
32410 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
32411 using the counter inset,
32412 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
32413 This allows one to set a counter's value;
32414 to reset it (to zero);
32418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32419 Note that the section counter,
32421 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
32423 if you want the next section to be section five,
32425 then you need to set the section counter to four.
32430 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
32431 since the value added can be negative);
32433 to restore the saved value;
32434 and to print the value.
32435 These effects can also be limited to \SpecialChar LyX
32437 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
32438 as well as in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32442 \begin_layout Standard
32443 There are five commands you can use:
32446 \begin_layout Enumerate
32452 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
32455 \begin_layout Enumerate
32461 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
32462 if you choose a negative number)
32465 \begin_layout Enumerate
32471 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
32474 \begin_layout Enumerate
32477 Save value of counter:
32480 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
32483 \begin_layout Enumerate
32486 Restore value of counter:
32489 Restores the previously saved value.
32492 \begin_layout Standard
32493 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
32496 \begin_layout Section
32498 \begin_inset Index idx
32503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32512 name "sec:Appendices"
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32520 Appendices are created with the menu
32522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32534 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
32535 This part is marked with a red borderline.
32538 \begin_layout Standard
32539 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
32540 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
32541 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
32542 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32548 \begin_inset space ~
32552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32554 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32570 reference "subsec:Export"
32578 \begin_layout Section
32580 \begin_inset Index idx
32585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32594 name "sec:Bibliography"
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32602 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
32604 You can include a bibliography database,
32605 which is explained in sec.
32606 \begin_inset space ~
32610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32612 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32621 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
32622 using the paragraph environment
32627 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
32628 \begin_inset space ~
32632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32634 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
32640 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
32641 such as author-year citations,
32642 and if you have more than a handful of references,
32643 then you should seriously consider
32647 using a bibliography database.
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32651 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
32652 we use two bibliographies in this document,
32657 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
32659 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
32661 the database approach relieves you,
32662 amongst other things,
32663 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
32666 \begin_layout Subsection
32667 The Bibliography Environment
32668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32670 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32683 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
32684 If you click on it,
32685 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
32694 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
32695 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
32696 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
32700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32705 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
32711 \begin_inset Newline newline
32715 \begin_inset Flex URL
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32720 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
32731 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32741 a short form of its title,
32743 \begin_inset Newline newline
32751 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
32756 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32764 \begin_layout Standard
32765 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
32767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32770 or the toolbar button
32773 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
32777 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
32778 Select one or more keys from the list and
32788 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
32789 If you click on the box,
32790 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
32793 \begin_layout Standard
32794 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
32795 Here are two examples;
32796 the first without a label,
32797 the second with the label
32798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32808 \begin_layout Standard
32812 Companion Second Edition
32816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32818 key "latexcompanion"
32826 \begin_layout Standard
32827 The \SpecialChar LyX
32828 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
32830 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
32842 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32848 \begin_inset Index idx
32853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32875 \begin_inset space ~
32880 in the document settings
32881 \begin_inset Index idx
32886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32888 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32904 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32906 \begin_inset space ~
32912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32914 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32923 Once you have done that,
32926 Bibliography item settings
32928 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32947 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
32948 the second the year (without parentheses).
32949 These two are madatory.
32950 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
32956 ) and in abrreviated form (
32961 add the abbreviated form to
32965 and the full list to the optional
32970 If specified like this,
32971 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles in the
32973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32990 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list.
32991 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
32992 In the bibliography entry,
32993 author and year must be added manually.
32996 \begin_layout Standard
32997 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
32999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33001 \begin_inset space ~
33009 arg "layout-paragraph"
33013 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
33016 \begin_layout Subsection
33017 Bibliography databases
33018 \begin_inset Index idx
33023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33042 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33049 \begin_layout Standard
33050 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
33054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33055 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
33056 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33061 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
33062 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
33063 This database can be used for different documents,
33064 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
33065 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33069 The database is a text file with the file extension
33070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33082 containing the bibliography in a special format.
33083 The format is explained in
33084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33091 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33095 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33101 The file can be created using any text editor,
33102 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33103 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33105 \begin_inset Flex URL
33108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33110 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33118 \begin_layout Standard
33120 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33121 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33122 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
33123 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
33124 But it has its drawbacks,
33125 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33126 Those are addressed by
33131 \begin_inset Index idx
33136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33154 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33155 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33166 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33168 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33169 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
33179 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
33182 \begin_layout Standard
33183 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33189 set in the document settings (menu
33191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33195 \begin_inset Index idx
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 \begin_inset space ~
33228 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33237 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33239 \begin_inset Index idx
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33250 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33264 \begin_layout Standard
33265 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33270 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33272 \begin_inset space ~
33278 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33286 Add bibliography to TOC
33288 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
33293 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
33298 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
33299 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
33302 \begin_layout Standard
33303 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33304 style file is a text file with the file extension
33305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33316 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
33317 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33318 distribution should provide several of these,
33319 and many publishers provide their own style files,
33320 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
33321 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
33322 but this is something for experts.
33326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33327 For information on how this is done,
33329 \begin_inset Newline newline
33333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33335 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
33345 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33351 which provides an alpha-numeric style.
33354 \begin_layout Standard
33355 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
33358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33360 \begin_inset Index idx
33365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33367 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 \begin_inset Index idx
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 Accessing a database via
33412 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33417 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33419 \begin_inset space ~
33425 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33426 you cannot select a
33430 file at this place.
33431 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33434 note the following.
33437 \begin_layout Standard
33442 has two different style files:
33443 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
33444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33455 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
33456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33467 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
33468 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
33469 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
33472 \begin_layout Standard
33477 styles are not set in the
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33486 but in the document settings.
33487 \begin_inset Index idx
33492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33494 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33509 in the dialog in the
33514 which is only visible if you use
33519 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
33520 These options are described in detail in the
33526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33537 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
33538 \begin_inset space ~
33542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33544 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33556 Bibliography Processors
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 To generate the bibliography from a database,
33562 uses a bibliography processor,
33563 that is an external program that reads the database,
33564 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
33565 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33567 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
33568 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
33572 \begin_layout Standard
33574 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
33575 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
33576 You can do this on a general level in
33578 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33579 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33580 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33583 or for individual documents in
33585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33590 The following variants are available by default:
33593 \begin_layout Description
33596 \begin_inset Index idx
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 developed exclusively for
33622 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33628 provides full Unicode support,
33629 unlimited memory and many specific features
33639 it is strongly recommended to use
33646 \begin_layout Description
33647 bibtex the standard;
33648 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
33650 works with all bibliography packages,
33651 although it will probably fail with
33655 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
33658 \begin_layout Description
33659 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
33665 works with all bibliography packages,
33666 although more complex
33670 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
33675 features are supported.
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 By default (with the
33685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33699 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33700 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33701 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33706 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
33719 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33720 -based bibliography styles).
33721 This should suit most needs.
33724 \begin_layout Standard
33725 In Japanese documents,
33726 a specific processor is used.
33727 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
33728 (in \SpecialChar LyX
33734 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33735 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
33736 You can adjust it in
33738 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33739 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33740 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33746 \begin_layout Standard
33747 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
33748 Before adding options,
33749 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33770 \begin_layout Standard
33772 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
33773 These are explained in detail in section
33775 Customizing Bibliographies
33779 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33784 Additional Features
33786 manual.Citation Format
33787 \begin_inset Index idx
33792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33811 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
33818 \begin_layout Standard
33819 Many different citation formats are common,
33821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33825 \begin_inset space \space{}
33828 numerical citation (as
33829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33836 like in this document),
33837 alpha-numerical citations (as
33838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33845 ) or author-year citations (as
33846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33855 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
33858 \begin_layout Standard
33859 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
33862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33863 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33867 \begin_inset Index idx
33872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33874 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 you have a range of other options,
33889 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
33894 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
33898 \begin_inset space ~
33909 \begin_inset space ~
33914 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
33915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33917 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33925 \begin_layout Standard
33926 With a bibliography database (see
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33929 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33937 ) one has in contrary to the
33941 environment full access to the formatting styles.
33942 These style formats are available:
33945 \begin_layout Description
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33950 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33951 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
33954 \begin_layout Description
33955 Biblatex loads the package
33960 \begin_inset Index idx
33965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33982 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
33984 Biblatex citation style
33988 Biblatex bibliography style
33991 Options to the package
33995 can be entered in the
34002 \begin_layout Description
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34011 mode) loads the package
34015 with the natbib compatibility mode.
34016 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
34027 behavior very closely.
34032 this option has some additional styles.
34037 styles are also supported by this variant.
34040 \begin_layout Description
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34045 (BibTeX) loads the package
34050 \begin_inset Index idx
34055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34072 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34075 \begin_layout Description
34077 \begin_inset space ~
34080 (BibTeX) loads the package
34085 \begin_inset Index idx
34090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34093 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34110 \begin_layout Standard
34119 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
34120 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34130 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34132 Whether the output uses numerical,
34133 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34135 Biblatex citation style
34139 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
34140 a suitable style is proposed.
34147 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
34152 multiple style variants are available in the
34157 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
34158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34173 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34178 \begin_inset space \space{}
34182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34193 \begin_layout Standard
34194 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
34196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34200 \begin_inset space \space{}
34204 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
34205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34209 \begin_inset space \space{}
34213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34225 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34243 Here is a simple example where the text
34244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34255 appears after the reference:
34258 \begin_layout Quote
34260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34263 key "latexcompanion"
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34272 All styles except for
34276 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
34277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34285 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
34286 if the style requires this.
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34290 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
34291 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
34292 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
34293 the postnote will follow the last.
34298 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
34299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34302 qualified citation lists
34303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34309 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
34313 dialog will display three columns in the field
34321 \begin_inset space ~
34330 \begin_inset space ~
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34344 If you double-click on an item's
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34355 \begin_inset space ~
34361 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
34364 General text before
34370 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
34373 \begin_layout Subsection
34374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34376 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
34380 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34386 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
34389 \begin_inset space ~
34393 \begin_inset space ~
34397 \begin_inset space ~
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34404 Content\SpecialChar ldots
34407 context menu if specific conditions are met:
34410 \begin_layout Itemize
34411 If citation entries include any of the fields
34412 \begin_inset Flex Code
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34422 \begin_inset Flex Code
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34431 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
34433 \begin_inset Flex Code
34436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
34447 \begin_inset Flex Code
34450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34457 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
34460 \begin_layout Itemize
34461 If citation entries include any of the fields
34462 \begin_inset Flex Code
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 (filled by JabRef and Zotero) or
34472 \begin_inset Flex Code
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34481 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
34482 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
34483 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
34486 \begin_layout Standard
34487 In addition to that,
34493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34494 By default we provide python script
34495 \begin_inset Flex Code
34498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 but you can use any modified script by setting
34506 \begin_inset Flex Code
34509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34512 citation_search_view
34517 variable in the file
34521 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
34523 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
34527 The default setting is to be found in the file
34531 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
34536 your disk for matching files if you enable
34538 Search drive for cited files
34542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34543 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
34544 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34549 It uses the tokens supplied at
34553 in the same preferences section (by default:
34558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34559 Provided by token sequence
34560 \begin_inset Flex Code
34563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34564 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
34570 Note that some constituents (
34571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34588 commas) are automatically stripped from the result.
34594 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the name of the file (at arbitrary position).
34596 opens the first matching file it finds.
34597 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
34598 the more systematic your file naming is,
34599 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
34600 the greater the chance this works for you.
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
34605 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34607 \begin_inset Flex Code
34610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34617 \begin_inset Flex Code
34620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34627 but there are also special keys,
34628 which are documented in the
34630 Customization manual
34636 Cite format description
34641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34642 Security implications
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 Note that any document (or mainly
34647 \begin_inset Flex Code
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34656 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
34661 but beware what you are doing).
34664 \begin_layout Section
34666 \begin_inset Index idx
34671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34687 \begin_layout Standard
34688 An index entry is created if you use the menu
34690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34692 \begin_inset space ~
34697 or the toolbar button
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34710 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
34715 for some advanced methods).
34716 A collapsible inset with green label is inserted;
34717 this holds the text that appears in the index (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
34720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34727 index inset in the heading above for example).
34728 The word where the cursor is in,
34729 or the currently highlighted text,
34730 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
34732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34736 copied into the inset).
34739 \begin_layout Standard
34740 The index list (which prints out the index in your document) is inserted via the menu
34742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34743 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34751 A light blue box labeled
34752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34763 will show the place where the index will be printed.
34765 the index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
34767 as there are no settings to make.
34768 This changes if you select
34769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34772 Use multiple indexes
34773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34777 \begin_inset space ~
34781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34783 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
34793 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34798 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
34800 you can customize index entries to look different.
34801 You can group index entries hierarchically,
34802 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
34803 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
34804 or additionally to,
34806 you can format the page reference (e.
34807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34811 make it bold for specific pages),
34812 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
34813 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
34815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34827 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
34830 \begin_layout Standard
34831 We describe these features in turn in the next subsections.
34832 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34833 's index mechanism,
34834 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34838 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
34846 \begin_layout Subsection
34847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34849 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
34853 Grouping Index Entries
34854 \begin_inset Index idx
34859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34861 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 Index entries are often hierarchically grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index and to hold categories together (e.g.,
34885 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34892 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34899 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
34902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34903 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
34913 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
34914 Maximally two such subentry insets,
34916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34920 three levels of grouping in total,
34921 are allowed per index entry.
34922 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
34923 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
34924 In the \SpecialChar LyX
34926 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
34931 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34940 \begin_layout Standard
34942 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
34943 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry).
34946 \begin_layout Standard
34947 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34949 subentries are indicated by a preceding exclamation mark character
34950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34958 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
34960 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
34962 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34970 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
34979 \begin_layout Subsection
34981 \begin_inset Index idx
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35005 \begin_layout Standard
35007 an index entry refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted.
35008 If you want to refer to a page range instead,
35009 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
35010 one that marks the beginning of the range,
35011 the other that marks its end.
35012 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
35013 To mark start and end,
35014 select the respective
35018 option in the index inset settings dialog.
35019 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
35020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35040 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
35041 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
35044 \begin_layout Subsection
35046 \begin_inset Index idx
35051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35071 It is also possible to refer to another index entry rather than,
35074 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
35076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35088 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
35089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35101 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35108 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35130 \begin_layout Standard
35131 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
35134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35135 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
35145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35146 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35158 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
35159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35177 \begin_layout Subsection
35178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35180 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35185 \begin_inset Index idx
35190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35209 \begin_layout Standard
35210 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
35211 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
35215 ) if you use accented characters in the index entry or if you use macros.
35218 \begin_layout Standard
35219 To accommodate for that,
35222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35223 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35227 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
35228 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
35230 you can pass the sort key
35231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35242 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35246 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35248 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
35249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35257 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35259 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
35261 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35269 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35277 \begin_layout Subsection
35278 Index Entry Formatting
35279 \begin_inset Index idx
35284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 \begin_layout Standard
35304 The appearance of index entries can be formatted as usual via the text style dialog,
35305 the toolbar or shortcuts.
35306 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry.
35307 \begin_inset Index idx
35312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35320 This is an italic dummy entry
35330 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
35332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35345 will be listed separately.
35349 \begin_layout Standard
35350 To format a page reference,
35355 option in the index entry settings dialog.
35356 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
35376 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
35383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35387 a self-defined command
35388 \begin_inset Flex Code
35391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 or an existing macro such as
35398 \begin_inset Flex Code
35401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35410 \begin_layout Standard
35412 we encourage you to use self-defined commands.
35413 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
35414 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
35416 add a formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined by putting the following in the preamble
35419 \begin_layout Standard
35431 \begin_layout Standard
35432 and add the custom formatting
35433 \begin_inset Flex Code
35436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35442 to the respective entry settings dialog.
35445 \begin_layout Standard
35446 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
35447 If you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
35448 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
35449 not every single index entry.
35452 \begin_layout Standard
35453 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35462 If you use the index processor
35468 makeindex or xindex
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35477 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
35483 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
35488 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
35489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35496 (style file) you use before they can be used.
35498 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
35501 \begin_layout Verbatim
35503 (markup-locref :open "
35505 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
35508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35513 key "latexcompanion"
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 You can also change the layout of the whole index.
35529 if you mark the index list box as bold,
35530 you will get a bold font for all index entries.
35533 it is better (and required for more advanced tasks) to set up a so-called
35558 ) to determine the formatting;
35559 please refer to the
35572 documentations for details,
35574 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35576 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
35582 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35583 packages available that ease such formatting,
35585 \begin_inset Flex URL
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35590 https://ctan.org/topic/index
35598 \begin_layout Subsection
35599 Special Characters in Index Entries
35600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35602 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35610 As already mentioned above,
35611 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
35614 \begin_inset Flex Code
35617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35625 \begin_inset Flex Code
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35636 \begin_inset Flex Code
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35650 \begin_inset Flex Code
35653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35660 If you use them literally,
35661 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
35663 you will not get the character itself.
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35667 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
35669 \begin_inset Quotes els
35673 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35677 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
35679 the escape character is
35680 \begin_inset Flex Code
35683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35684 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35692 (but this can be changed).
35694 \begin_inset Flex Code
35697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35698 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35708 \begin_inset Flex Code
35711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35712 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35722 \begin_inset Flex Code
35725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35726 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35730 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
35740 \begin_inset Flex Code
35743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35752 to get the special character you want.
35753 Note that the escape character,
35755 \begin_inset Flex Code
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35759 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35772 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
35773 \begin_inset space ~
35777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35779 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35787 \begin_layout Subsection
35788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35790 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
35794 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
35797 \begin_layout Standard
35798 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
35799 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
35800 This is not only time-consuming,
35801 but also error-prone;
35803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35807 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
35809 provides some functions to ease the task.
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35814 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
35815 you can open the outliner via
35817 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35827 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
35837 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
35838 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
35843 it will be more easier),
35848 -click on the entry and select
35850 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
35852 from the context menu.
35853 This will do just what it says:
35854 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35860 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
35861 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
35862 you can select from the context menu
35864 Index All Occurrences of this Word
35867 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
35868 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
35869 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
35870 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
35874 is the word before the index entry,
35879 will be considered as well,
35885 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
35887 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
35888 but only relevant occurrences!
35889 So as convenient as this function might seem,
35890 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
35892 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
35895 \begin_layout Subsection
35897 \begin_inset Index idx
35902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35921 name "subsec:Index-Program"
35928 \begin_layout Standard
35929 If the index processor,
35942 for that matter) for index generation;
35943 otherwise the program
35948 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35951 As a further option,
35952 you can select the rather new
35959 \begin_layout Itemize
35965 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
35966 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
35967 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35975 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35981 how to manually fix this sorting,
35982 but this is very tedious work).
35985 \begin_layout Itemize
35986 The alternative program,
35992 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
35993 It can sort most languages correctly,
35994 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
36000 is no longer actively maintained,
36001 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
36007 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
36008 But if you have it available,
36009 it is almost always a better option than
36016 \begin_layout Itemize
36023 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
36024 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
36025 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
36026 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
36028 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
36029 The program is still in development,
36030 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
36031 But the program is definitely worth a try,
36036 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
36039 \begin_layout Standard
36040 All processors can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
36041 's preferences dialog,
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36049 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
36055 The available options are listed and explained in
36056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36058 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
36065 you can even specify arbitrary alternative programs to generate the index.
36068 \begin_layout Standard
36069 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
36070 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
36073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36074 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36078 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
36081 \begin_layout Subsection
36082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36084 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36091 \begin_layout Standard
36092 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
36094 you might need to set up a separate
36095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36102 next to the standard index.
36104 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
36105 but there are packages that add this feature.
36112 \begin_inset Index idx
36117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36134 package to generate multiple indexes.
36135 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 If yours does not ship it,
36142 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
36145 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36153 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36155 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
36156 Please consult the package's manual for details.
36164 \begin_layout Standard
36165 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
36166 for the use of multiple indexes,
36169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36170 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36173 and select the option
36175 Use multiple Indexes
36182 already contains the standard index
36183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36191 To add further indexes,
36192 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
36196 input field and press the
36201 The new index now also appears in the list.
36203 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
36204 label color to the new index.
36207 \begin_layout Standard
36208 Once the document changes have been applied,
36209 you can find the new index list in
36211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36212 List/Contents/References
36218 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
36219 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
36220 but there are additional features:
36223 \begin_layout Itemize
36224 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
36225 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
36228 \begin_layout Itemize
36229 By right-clicking on an index,
36230 you can change its type.
36232 you can specify an index to be a
36238 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
36240 if you use a book class,
36241 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
36242 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
36245 \begin_layout Itemize
36250 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
36251 code in the name of the index.
36254 \begin_layout Section
36255 Nomenclature/Glossary
36256 \begin_inset Index idx
36261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 \begin_inset Index idx
36273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
36278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36292 name "sec:Nomenclature"
36299 \begin_layout Standard
36300 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
36303 \begin_layout Standard
36304 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
36305 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36311 \begin_inset Index idx
36316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36334 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36344 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36348 \begin_layout Standard
36349 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
36351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36362 or the toolbar button
36365 arg "nomencl-insert"
36370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36381 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
36386 The first is the term or
36390 that you wish to define.
36395 of the term or symbol.
36398 \begin_layout Standard
36399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36408 To use \SpecialChar TeX
36409 code for nomenclature entries the option
36413 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
36421 \begin_layout Subsection
36422 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
36423 \begin_inset Index idx
36428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36430 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 If you have symbols in formulas,
36449 you have to define them in the
36453 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
36456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36460 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36469 \begin_inset Newline newline
36477 \begin_inset Newline newline
36483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36490 character starts/ends the formula.
36491 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36492 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
36493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36503 For capital Greek letters,
36504 start the command also with a capital letter,
36514 \begin_layout Standard
36515 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36516 syntax is given in section
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36523 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36531 \begin_layout Standard
36535 \begin_inset space ~
36540 dialog to format the description text;
36541 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
36543 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
36544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36548 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36555 in this document is:
36556 \begin_inset Newline newline
36561 dummy entry for the character
36566 \begin_inset Newline newline
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36588 font use the command
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36620 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
36621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36625 \begin_inset space \space{}
36629 \begin_inset Newline newline
36645 \begin_inset Newline newline
36648 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
36649 This command will make the font of all symbols
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 If the characters |
36666 \begin_inset space \space{}
36670 \begin_inset space \space{}
36674 \begin_inset space \space{}
36679 \begin_inset space \space{}
36683 \begin_inset space \space{}
36686 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
36687 code they need to be escaped by adding a percent character in front of them.
36688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36689 LatexCommand nomenclature
36690 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
36691 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
36699 \begin_layout Subsection
36700 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
36701 \begin_inset Index idx
36706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36726 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36727 -code of the symbol definition.
36728 This leads to undesired results when you,
36730 have symbols in formulas.
36731 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
36734 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36735 LatexCommand nomenclature
36737 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
36745 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36749 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36750 LatexCommand nomenclature
36753 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
36759 They will be sorted by
36760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36786 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36789 will be sorted before the
36793 since the character
36794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36801 is considered in sorting.
36804 \begin_layout Standard
36805 To control the sort order,
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36814 field of the nomenclature dialog.
36815 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
36816 For the example given,
36821 in this field for the
36822 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36830 will be located before
36831 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36837 \begin_layout Standard
36838 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36854 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 Nomenclature Options
36856 \begin_inset Index idx
36861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36863 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36880 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36892 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
36893 Here are some of its options;
36894 for more have a look at its documentation:
36897 \begin_layout Description
36898 refeq Appends the phrase
36899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36915 to every nomenclature entry,
36922 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
36925 \begin_layout Description
36926 refpage Appends the phrase
36927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36943 to every nomenclature entry,
36950 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
36953 \begin_layout Description
36954 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
36957 \begin_layout Standard
36958 To use one or more of the options,
36959 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
36961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36965 In this document the options
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
36980 \begin_layout Standard
36981 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
36985 field in the nomenclature dialog:
36988 \begin_layout Description
36998 \begin_layout Description
37001 nomrefpage Like the
37008 \begin_layout Description
37011 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
37020 \begin_layout Description
37024 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37035 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
37038 \begin_layout Standard
37040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37047 are automatically translated for most document languages.
37049 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
37053 \begin_layout Standard
37062 \begin_inset Newline newline
37068 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37072 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset Newline newline
37095 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37096 \begin_inset Newline newline
37102 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_layout Standard
37125 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
37126 assure that you use
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37134 in the document settings under
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37145 \begin_layout Standard
37153 \begin_inset Newline newline
37157 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37174 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
37176 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
37177 \begin_inset Newline newline
37184 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37185 \begin_inset Newline newline
37189 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37206 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37212 Printing the Nomenclature
37213 \begin_inset Index idx
37218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37237 \begin_layout Standard
37238 To print the nomenclature,
37241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37242 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37258 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
37259 By right-clicking on it,
37260 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
37261 You can choose between these settings:
37264 \begin_layout Description
37265 Default a space of 1
37266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37272 \begin_layout Description
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37281 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
37284 \begin_layout Description
37285 Custom custom space
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37289 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
37290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37298 If you are not happy with the name,
37299 you can change it by redefining the command
37307 in order to change the name to
37312 add the following line to the preamble:
37315 \begin_layout Standard
37328 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37332 When you are using another document language than English,
37334 \begin_inset Newline newline
37350 where *** is the name of the language used.
37353 \begin_layout Subsection
37354 Nomenclature Program
37355 \begin_inset Index idx
37360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37379 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
37386 \begin_layout Standard
37393 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37395 to generate the nomenclature.
37397 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
37403 \begin_inset space ~
37407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37409 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37415 The available options are listed and explained in
37416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37418 key "nomencl,makeindex"
37426 \begin_layout Section
37428 \begin_inset Index idx
37433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37440 \begin_inset Index idx
37445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37464 name "sec:Branches"
37471 \begin_layout Standard
37472 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
37473 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
37474 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
37479 allows you to put text into branches.
37480 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
37481 To create a branch,
37482 either select the menu
37484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37485 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
37488 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
37490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37498 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
37499 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
37500 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
37501 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
37503 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
37504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37519 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
37520 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
37523 \begin_layout Standard
37524 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
37525 These boxes are inserted via the menu
37527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37530 where you can choose a branch.
37531 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
37534 \begin_layout Standard
37535 Here is an example,
37536 where only the question text appears,
37537 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
37540 \begin_layout Standard
37541 \begin_inset Branch Question
37545 \begin_layout Standard
37551 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37564 \begin_layout Standard
37570 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
37578 \begin_layout Standard
37585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
37591 Consider for example a file
37592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37599 which has the above branches.
37601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37609 the PDF export file would be called
37610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37633 branch were inactive,
37635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37672 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
37673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37676 if both branches were active.
37677 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
37678 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37684 \begin_layout Standard
37685 It is also possible to invert just some branch insets,
37686 whose content is output just in case the branch is
37690 activated (they are marked with ~ before the name).
37691 Such insets make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
37692 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
37693 right-click on the inset button and choose
37696 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_layout Standard
37705 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37723 branch is deactivated.
37729 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37735 \begin_layout Standard
37736 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
37737 like inside equations,
37738 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
37739 definitions for each branch.
37740 For example you can define for the question branch
37744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37745 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37754 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37767 \begin_layout Standard
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37787 \begin_layout Standard
37788 and for the answer branch
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37801 \begin_layout Standard
37811 \begin_layout Standard
37812 \begin_inset Branch Question
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37848 \begin_layout Standard
37849 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37853 \begin_layout Standard
37857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 Now it is possible to use the
37890 question{\SpecialChar ldots
37897 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
37900 commands to obtain conditional output.
37901 Here is an example formula where only the
37908 \begin_inset Formula
37910 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37920 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
37928 \begin_layout Standard
37929 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
37930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37934 \begin_inset space \space{}
37937 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
37939 For this advanced usage,
37947 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 In case you often need to keep all branches of a given name in sync as far as their open/close status is concerned,
37954 you can use the \SpecialChar LyX
37959 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
37960 You can bind it to a keyboard shortcut or add it to a user-defined context menu for branch insets.
37963 \begin_layout Section
37965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37967 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
37972 \begin_inset Index idx
37977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37990 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37993 allows you to set up specifics of your document's PDF output.
37994 Most of these specifics are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38000 \begin_inset Index idx
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38022 which you need to enable by clicking
38024 Use Hyperref Support
38026 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
38027 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
38029 Customize Hyperref Options
38032 Among other things,
38033 hyperref hyperlinks all URLs and cross-references in the PDF output.
38034 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on an URL,
38035 a table of contents entry or on a reference to open a website or to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
38037 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
38038 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
38041 \begin_layout Standard
38042 The header information in the dialog tab
38046 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
38047 Many programs are able to extract this information,
38049 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
38050 This is very useful to sort,
38051 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
38055 \begin_inset space ~
38059 \begin_inset space ~
38065 hyperref tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
38069 \begin_inset space ~
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38082 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
38083 which is useful for presentations.
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38091 you can customize the look of such links,
38092 and you can specify if and which bibliographical backreferences are created.
38097 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
38098 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited.
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38115 option allows long links to be split;
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38123 \begin_inset space ~
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38135 \begin_inset space ~
38140 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38149 colors the different links.
38150 The default colors are:
38153 \begin_layout Labeling
38154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38159 for hyperlinks and URLs
38162 \begin_layout Labeling
38163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38171 \begin_layout Labeling
38172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 but you can change these in the tab
38187 in this document they were changed with these additional options added to
38194 \begin_layout Quote
38203 \begin_layout Standard
38208 you can specify if PDF bookmarks (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader) should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
38209 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
38214 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
38219 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38224 2 will display all sections and subsections,
38226 \begin_inset space ~
38229 1 will only display the sections (collapsing the rest).
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38237 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
38238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38245 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
38246 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
38247 \begin_inset Flex Code
38250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38259 not via the package options.
38260 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
38261 If you need to use one of those options,
38262 you can set them by adding
38265 \begin_layout Quote
38268 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option2
38271 \begin_layout Standard
38274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38275 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38278 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38286 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
38288 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
38289 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
38290 input is simply ignored).
38291 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
38297 At the point of writing this,
38298 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
38300 documentmetadata-support.pdf
38303 but it is expected that in the future,
38304 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
38307 \begin_layout Section
38309 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38313 name "sec:TeX-Code"
38320 \begin_layout Subsection
38323 \begin_inset Index idx
38328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38338 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38345 \begin_layout Standard
38346 As \SpecialChar LyX
38347 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
38349 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
38350 commands and constructs,
38353 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
38354 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
38355 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38356 -package for every problem,
38357 though \SpecialChar LyX
38358 cannot support all packages and their commands.
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38363 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
38364 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
38365 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
38368 Code box is created by the menu
38370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38377 or by the toolbar button
38390 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
38397 \begin_layout Standard
38398 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
38400 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
38403 if you want to draw a frame around a word
38407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
38413 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38421 you can write the command part
38427 in a \SpecialChar TeX
38428 Code box before the word and the closing brace
38432 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
38433 Code box behind the word.
38434 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
38435 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
38438 \begin_layout Standard
38439 \begin_inset Graphics
38440 filename clipart/ERT.png
38448 \begin_layout Standard
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38453 This is a line with a
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
38491 -commands without parameters,
38492 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
38493 know that the command is finished.
38501 \begin_layout Subsection
38502 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38504 \begin_inset Argument 1
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38515 \begin_inset Index idx
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38530 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38537 \begin_layout Standard
38538 When you write larger documents or books,
38539 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38540 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
38541 uses in the background.
38542 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
38543 is based on commands,
38545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38553 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
38555 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
38556 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
38557 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
38558 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
38561 \begin_layout Standard
38562 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
38564 As mentioned above,
38565 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38567 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38570 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38580 \begin_layout Standard
38581 As result you find that the package
38586 \begin_inset Index idx
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
38612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38615 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38619 \begin_inset space ~
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38632 usepackage[options]{package name}
38635 \begin_layout Standard
38636 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
38637 commands begin with a backslash,
38638 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
38639 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
38642 \begin_layout Standard
38643 In your case the package name is
38648 After a look in the documentation of the package,
38649 you know that the option
38653 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
38654 So you add the command
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38662 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
38665 \begin_layout Standard
38666 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 For more commands provided by the
38676 have a look at its documentation,
38678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38693 \begin_layout Standard
38694 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
38695 For example if you use a
38700 you don't need the package
38705 you can instead write
38708 \begin_layout Standard
38713 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
38718 \begin_layout Standard
38719 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
38720 So if you plan to write a large document,
38721 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
38728 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
38731 \begin_layout Standard
38732 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
38733 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
38734 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38736 use the \SpecialChar TeX
38737 Code box as described in the previous section.
38740 \begin_layout Standard
38741 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
38743 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38747 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
38755 \begin_layout Standard
38756 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38762 \begin_layout Standard
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 \begin_inset Note Note
38779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38780 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
38788 \begin_layout Left Header
38789 \begin_inset Argument 1
38792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 \begin_inset Note Note
38815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38816 defines the header line as described below
38824 \begin_layout Center Header
38825 \begin_inset Argument 1
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 \begin_layout Right Header
38838 \begin_inset Argument 1
38841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 \begin_layout Left Footer
38863 \begin_inset Argument 1
38866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 \begin_layout Center Footer
38888 \begin_inset Argument 1
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38903 \begin_inset Newline newline
38907 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38913 \begin_layout Right Footer
38914 \begin_inset Argument 1
38917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 \begin_layout Section
38940 Customized Page Headers and Footers
38941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38943 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
38948 \begin_inset Index idx
38953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38970 \begin_inset Index idx
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 \begin_layout Standard
38985 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
38986 you need to set the
38989 \begin_inset space ~
39000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39006 \begin_inset space ~
39012 As a second step add in the menu
39014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39024 Custom Header/Footerlines
39027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39031 This module offers the following 6
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39038 \begin_layout Description
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39062 \begin_layout Description
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 for the different positions in the header/footer.
39088 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
39091 \begin_layout Standard
39093 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
39094 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
39096 \begin_inset space ~
39100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39102 reference "fig:Page-layout"
39107 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
39110 \begin_layout Standard
39111 \begin_inset Float figure
39118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 \begin_inset Tabular
39122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
39123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
39124 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39126 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
39140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39146 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
39189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 The normal text on the page goes here.
39191 The running header is above the text,
39192 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
39193 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
39194 title of the chapter,
39195 company logo but you can use almost anything,
39201 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39210 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39239 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39291 name "fig:Page-layout"
39295 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39318 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39326 is set to “Default”.
39327 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
39335 \begin_layout Subsection
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39340 To define your header line,
39341 add all three header environments.
39342 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
39343 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
39344 For single-sided documents,
39345 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
39346 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
39347 nothing appears in the output.
39348 Defining the footer line works similarly.
39351 \begin_layout Standard
39352 For the definition,
39353 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39354 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
39357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_layout Description
39370 thepage prints the current page number
39373 \begin_layout Description
39376 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
39379 \begin_layout Description
39382 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
39385 \begin_layout Description
39388 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
39389 If the document has chapters,
39390 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
39392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39396 \begin_inset Quotes prd
39399 because it usually goes in a left header.
39402 \begin_layout Description
39405 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
39406 If the document has chapters,
39407 it prints the current section number and title instead.
39408 It is normally used in the right header.
39411 \begin_layout Subsection
39412 Default header/footer
39415 \begin_layout Standard
39416 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
39417 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
39418 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
39419 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
39420 but leave it blank.
39422 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
39426 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_layout Subsection
39438 \begin_layout Standard
39439 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
39440 Some pages are different.
39441 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
39442 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
39443 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
39444 but that is normal.
39445 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
39448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39449 Header and footer decoration line
39452 \begin_layout Standard
39455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39458 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
39459 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
39471 in the following way:
39474 \begin_layout Standard
39481 headrulewidth}{thickness}
39484 \begin_layout Standard
39485 where thickness is a size in standard units like
39498 If you don't want a line,
39499 set the thickness to 0
39500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39506 \begin_layout Standard
39507 The lines can also be colored,
39508 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
39510 If you really need this,
39511 have a look at the Internet or in section
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39527 Several header/footer lines
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39531 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
39532 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
39534 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
39535 To expand the height,
39536 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39552 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39562 \begin_layout Standard
39569 headheight}{height}
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39577 is a size in standard units (e.
39578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39582 \begin_inset space \space{}
39590 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
39591 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
39592 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39593 logfile with the menu
39595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset space ~
39610 to see if you can find a warning about the package
39615 \begin_inset Index idx
39620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39623 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39638 If there is such a warning,
39639 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
39642 \begin_layout Subsection
39646 \begin_layout Standard
39647 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
39648 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
39649 This example consists of the following definition:
39652 \begin_layout Description
39654 \begin_inset space ~
39664 empty optional argument
39667 \begin_layout Description
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39673 empty optional argument
39676 \begin_layout Description
39678 \begin_inset space ~
39688 in the optional argument
39691 \begin_layout Description
39693 \begin_inset space ~
39703 in the optional argument
39706 \begin_layout Description
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39726 \begin_inset Newline newline
39730 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
39734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39737 in the optional argument
39740 \begin_layout Description
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39752 empty optional argument
39755 \begin_layout Description
39758 headrulewidth set to 2
39759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39765 \begin_layout Standard
39766 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
39768 For more specialized features,
39771 see the manual of the
39777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39787 \begin_layout Standard
39788 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
39794 \begin_layout Standard
39798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39802 pagestyle{headings}
39808 \begin_inset Note Note
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 switches back to page style with the default headings
39820 \begin_layout Section
39821 Previewing Snippets of your Document
39822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39824 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39829 \begin_inset Index idx
39834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 \begin_inset Index idx
39846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39867 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
39870 \begin_layout Subsection
39874 \begin_layout Standard
39875 To get previews working,
39876 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39882 \begin_inset Index idx
39887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 (on some systems named simply
39909 If it is not already installed,
39910 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39920 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39922 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
39931 for \SpecialChar LyX
39932 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39933 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
39937 \begin_layout Subsection
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
39943 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39945 activate the option
39948 \begin_inset space ~
39955 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39961 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39968 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39993 is the multiplication factor for the size.
39996 \begin_layout Standard
39997 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40019 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
40020 and when you finish editing an inset.
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40033 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40042 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
40050 \begin_layout Subsection
40051 Selected document parts
40054 \begin_layout Standard
40055 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
40056 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
40057 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40060 insert a preview inset via the menu
40062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40066 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
40067 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
40068 If you click on the preview,
40069 you can edit the previewed stuff.
40072 \begin_layout Standard
40074 To create rotated boxes,
40075 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40082 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40094 is explained in section
40096 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40111 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
40112 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
40113 the final rotated boxes,
40114 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
40115 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
40116 Here is the result:
40119 \begin_layout Standard
40120 \begin_inset Preview
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40131 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
40137 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
40147 height_special "totalheight"
40152 backgroundcolor "none"
40155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40180 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
40186 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
40193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40208 \begin_layout Standard
40209 Previewing works also for colors.
40210 In this example a special framed,
40211 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40229 is explained in section
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40249 \begin_layout Standard
40250 \begin_inset Preview
40252 \begin_layout Standard
40256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40275 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
40280 This is text within a colored,
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40307 \begin_layout Standard
40308 If \SpecialChar LyX
40309 does not show a preview,
40310 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
40311 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40312 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
40314 If \SpecialChar LyX
40315 cannot create a preview,
40316 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40318 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
40319 Code and don't know if it is correct,
40320 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
40323 \begin_layout Subsection
40328 \begin_layout Standard
40329 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40330 source of the whole document or parts of it.
40333 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40340 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
40343 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
40345 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
40346 To view the whole document as source,
40347 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
40353 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
40355 but note that if you have several documents open,
40356 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
40358 not just the one which is open at the time.
40361 \begin_layout Section
40362 Advanced Find and Replace
40363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40365 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40370 \begin_inset Index idx
40375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40382 \begin_inset Index idx
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40396 \begin_layout Subsection
40400 \begin_layout Standard
40401 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
40402 allows for searching of complex,
40403 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
40405 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
40406 The key-features are:
40409 \begin_layout Itemize
40410 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
40411 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
40412 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
40413 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
40416 \begin_layout Itemize
40417 Search may be format-insensitive,
40418 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
40421 and even mathematics),
40422 or it may be format-sensitive,
40425 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
40428 \begin_layout Itemize
40429 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
40430 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
40433 \begin_layout Itemize
40434 Search may be widened to a specific
40440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40447 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
40448 all the open files,
40449 or all the manuals available from the
40456 \begin_layout Itemize
40457 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
40458 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
40459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40468 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40476 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
40478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40491 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
40494 ) or the toolbar button
40497 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40503 Advanced Find and Replace
40508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40512 \begin_layout Standard
40518 mini-editor a simple word,
40519 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40527 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
40530 arg "paragraph-break"
40534 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
40536 bold or normal face,
40537 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
40541 arg "paragraph-break"
40544 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
40548 searches backwards.
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40560 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
40568 \begin_inset space ~
40573 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
40576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40577 Searching for mathematics
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 Mathematical formulas,
40583 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
40586 or something more complex like
40587 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
40591 may be searched for by typing them in the
40596 When searching for a formula,
40597 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
40598 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
40599 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
40605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40609 \begin_layout Standard
40610 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
40611 This is done by switching to the
40615 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
40628 \begin_layout Itemize
40629 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
40632 \begin_layout Itemize
40633 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
40634 and within the same text style only.
40637 \begin_layout Itemize
40638 a normal word in a section heading,
40639 and searching for it,
40640 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
40642 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
40643 in addition to a section style,
40644 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
40647 \begin_layout Itemize
40648 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
40651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 The entries made in the
40660 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40669 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
40674 button or alternatively press
40677 arg "paragraph-break"
40684 while the cursor is in the
40687 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
40698 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
40701 \begin_layout Itemize
40702 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
40703 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
40704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40711 with its typewriter version
40712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40726 \begin_layout Itemize
40727 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
40728 for example replacing occurrences of
40729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40733 \begin_inset Formula $R$
40737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40745 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
40749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40752 (you may want to enable the
40755 \begin_inset space ~
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40768 options and disable the
40777 in order to avoid replacing all
40778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40785 letters occurring in normal text),
40787 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
40791 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
40796 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
40800 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
40806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40811 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
40815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40816 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
40818 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40820 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
40830 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
40835 This is done with the context menu
40837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40838 Insert Regular Expression
40840 while the cursor is in the
40845 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
40849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40850 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
40853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40860 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
40862 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
40868 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
40869 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
40870 Examples of using such a feature may be:
40873 \begin_layout Enumerate
40874 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
40880 editor the fraction
40881 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
40885 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40888 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
40891 \begin_layout Enumerate
40892 Searching for all text with a given style:
40896 Adhere to search string formatting of
40902 button in this section pressed,
40906 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40911 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
40912 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
40915 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40918 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
40919 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
40920 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
40924 \begin_layout Description
40925 Language Allows searching for text in specific language (relevant here is,
40926 as with the other options,
40927 the setting of the search string)
40930 \begin_layout Description
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40935 color colored text like cyan,
40940 \begin_layout Description
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_layout Description
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40959 \begin_layout Description
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_layout Description
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_layout Description
40982 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
40987 \begin_layout Description
40994 \begin_layout Description
40995 Strike-through Single,
40999 \begin_layout Description
41000 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_layout Standard
41019 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
41020 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
41021 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41025 and referring back to them through
41026 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41031 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
41037 try searching with the regexp
41038 \begin_inset Newline newline
41052 \begin_inset Newline newline
41055 in order to find word repetitions,
41059 \begin_layout Standard
41060 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) fully implemented.
41063 \begin_layout Standard
41064 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41073 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
41074 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
41075 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41084 always refers to the first occurrence of
41085 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41088 in all entered regexps.
41096 \begin_layout Section
41098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41100 name "sec:Spellchecking"
41105 \begin_inset Index idx
41110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41121 has a built-in spell checker.
41124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41132 key or the toolbar button
41135 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41138 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
41139 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
41140 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
41141 Whenever an unknown word is found,
41142 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
41143 In the spellchecker sidebar,
41144 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
41145 if any could be found.
41146 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
41151 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
41152 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
41155 \begin_layout Standard
41157 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
41159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
41165 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
41166 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41177 arg "dialog-show character"
41180 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
41182 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41186 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41187 can be downloaded from here:
41188 \begin_inset Newline newline
41192 \begin_inset Flex URL
41195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/dictionaries/dicts/
41203 \begin_inset Newline newline
41206 You should download 2
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41210 files for each language (use
41214 link at the end of the opened webpage).
41215 To install a dictionary on Windows,
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41220 files into \SpecialChar LyX
41221 's installation subfolder
41229 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41231 \begin_inset Newline newline
41234 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
41235 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
41236 but in most cases these are
41256 is the language code.
41259 \begin_layout Subsection
41263 \begin_layout Standard
41266 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41267 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41275 you can set the following things:
41278 \begin_layout Description
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41283 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
41284 should use for spell checking.
41285 Depending on your platform,
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41297 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
41298 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41316 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41324 language If this field is not empty,
41326 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
41327 no matter what the document language is.
41330 \begin_layout Description
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
41337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41341 \begin_inset space \space{}
41345 This should normally not be needed.
41348 \begin_layout Description
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41357 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
41358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41368 \begin_layout Description
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
41374 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
41375 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
41376 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
41377 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
41380 \begin_layout Description
41382 \begin_inset space ~
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41393 comments If enabled,
41394 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
41397 \begin_layout Section
41399 \begin_inset Index idx
41404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41413 name "sec:Thesaurus"
41420 \begin_layout Standard
41422 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
41423 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
41424 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41435 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
41446 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
41450 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
41451 which are available for many languages.
41454 \begin_layout Standard
41455 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
41459 \begin_layout Subsection
41460 Setting up the thesaurus
41463 \begin_layout Standard
41472 thesauri consist of two files per language:
41473 A file with the suffix
41477 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
41482 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
41483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41496 the US English files are named:
41499 \begin_layout Itemize
41503 \begin_layout Itemize
41507 \begin_layout Standard
41516 and its thesaurus installed,
41517 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
41520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41522 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41529 ) to the path where they are installed.
41533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
41536 typical locations are
41543 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
41548 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
41553 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
41557 dictionaries are to be found at
41563 LibreOffice-<Version>
41571 the default location is
41573 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
41574 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41575 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
41576 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
41577 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41578 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41587 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
41588 installation process,
41589 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
41592 \begin_layout Standard
41593 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
41594 updated thesaurus dictionaries,
41595 you can download them from here:
41596 \begin_inset Newline newline
41600 \begin_inset Flex URL
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41605 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
41613 \begin_layout Standard
41614 To install a new dictionary,
41615 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
41617 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41618 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41619 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41626 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41628 If this path is not defined yet,
41629 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41635 you can also install new dictionaries via
41637 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41642 via your package manager (look for
41648 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
41652 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
41653 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
41655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41662 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41663 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41665 \begin_inset space ~
41670 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
41673 \begin_layout Subsection
41674 Using the thesaurus
41677 \begin_layout Standard
41678 To start the thesaurus,
41681 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41684 or the toolbar button
41687 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41690 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
41691 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
41692 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
41694 for some languages (such as English),
41695 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
41696 but also generic terms (such as
41705 related terms (such as
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41731 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
41741 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
41744 \begin_layout Standard
41745 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
41746 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
41747 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
41750 \begin_layout Standard
41751 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
41757 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
41759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41763 \begin_inset space \space{}
41766 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
41767 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
41768 infinitive for verbs).
41770 looking up the word form
41775 while results are shown for the word form
41780 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
41781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41785 \begin_inset space \space{}
41797 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
41798 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
41799 thus the ending remains).
41802 \begin_layout Section
41804 \begin_inset Index idx
41809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 \begin_inset Index idx
41821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41840 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
41847 \begin_layout Standard
41848 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
41849 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
41850 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
41852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41857 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_layout Standard
41868 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
41883 The color depends on the author that made the change.
41884 You can change the color in
41886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41887 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41889 \begin_inset space ~
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41898 \SpecialChar menuseparator
41904 \begin_inset Index idx
41909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41925 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
41926 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
41927 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
41930 arg "changes-merge"
41936 \begin_layout Standard
41937 When change tracking is activated,
41938 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
41940 \begin_inset Index idx
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 \begin_layout Standard
41965 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41971 \begin_layout Standard
41972 \begin_inset Graphics
41973 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
41981 \begin_layout Standard
41982 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41988 \begin_layout Standard
41989 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
41992 \begin_layout Standard
41993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41999 \begin_layout Standard
42000 \begin_inset Tabular
42001 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
42002 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42004 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 arg "changes-track"
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42033 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42035 \begin_inset space ~
42044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42053 arg "changes-output"
42061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42072 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42078 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42112 Jumps to the next change
42118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42127 arg "change-accept"
42135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42166 arg "change-reject"
42174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42182 \begin_inset space ~
42185 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 arg "changes-merge"
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42224 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 arg "all-changes-accept"
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42263 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42269 \begin_inset space ~
42278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42287 arg "all-changes-reject"
42295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42301 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42303 \begin_inset space ~
42306 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42345 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42379 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42381 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_layout Standard
42398 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42405 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
42406 especially no format changes like from
42425 \begin_layout Standard
42426 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
42428 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
42429 When you merge changes,
42430 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
42431 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
42432 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
42433 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
42436 \begin_layout Standard
42437 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
42440 \begin_layout Section
42441 Comparison of Documents
42442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42444 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42449 \begin_inset Index idx
42454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42455 Comparison of documents
42463 \begin_layout Standard
42464 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
42467 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42471 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
42472 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
42473 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
42474 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42494 \begin_inset space ~
42498 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset space ~
42506 \begin_inset space ~
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42519 enables the change tracking option
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42535 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
42538 \begin_layout Section
42539 International Support
42540 \begin_inset Index idx
42545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42546 International support
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
42556 with any language you want.
42557 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42562 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
42570 \begin_layout Standard
42573 also supports phonetic symbols,
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42581 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
42589 \begin_layout Subsection
42591 \begin_inset Index idx
42596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42598 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42613 \begin_inset Index idx
42618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_inset Index idx
42640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 \begin_layout Standard
42662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42663 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42666 dialog lets you set
42669 the quote style and character encoding
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42679 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42689 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
42690 For details about the different encoding options see section
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42697 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42705 \begin_layout Subsection
42706 Keyboard mapping configuration
42707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42709 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42717 If you have for example a U.
42718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42721 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
42722 you can use an alternate keymap.
42724 if you want to write in Italian,
42725 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
42726 to use an Italian keymap.
42729 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42730 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42731 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
42734 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
42736 \begin_inset space ~
42740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42742 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
42748 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42753 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
42757 normally write in Italian on a U.
42758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42761 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
42763 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
42764 This and many other customizations are explained in the
42771 \begin_layout Chapter
42774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42776 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42784 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
42785 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
42788 \begin_layout Section
42790 \begin_inset Index idx
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42819 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
42822 \begin_layout Subsection
42826 \begin_layout Standard
42827 Creates a new document.
42830 \begin_layout Subsection
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42835 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
42836 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
42837 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
42839 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
42842 \begin_layout Subsection
42846 \begin_layout Standard
42850 \begin_layout Subsection
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
42856 Click there on a file to open it.
42859 \begin_layout Subsection
42863 \begin_layout Standard
42864 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
42868 \begin_layout Subsection
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 Closes the current document.
42876 \begin_layout Subsection
42880 \begin_layout Standard
42881 Closes all opened documents.
42884 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 \begin_layout Standard
42889 Saves the actual document.
42892 \begin_layout Subsection
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
42908 \begin_layout Subsection
42912 \begin_layout Standard
42913 Saves all opened documents.
42916 \begin_layout Subsection
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42921 Reloads the actual document from disk.
42924 \begin_layout Subsection
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
42930 It is described in the section
42932 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
42937 Additional Features
42942 \begin_layout Subsection
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42947 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
42953 plain text files and comma separated,
42954 table-like text files (CSV).
42955 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42960 When using the menu entry
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42969 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
42970 when using the menu entry
42973 \begin_inset space ~
42977 \begin_inset space ~
42981 \begin_inset space ~
42987 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
42988 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
42991 \begin_layout Subsection
42993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42995 name "subsec:Export"
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43003 You can export your document to various file formats.
43004 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43006 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
43007 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
43008 during its configuration.
43011 \begin_layout Standard
43012 Here is a list of all available entries;
43013 some of them are explained in detail in section
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43020 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43028 \begin_layout Description
43034 \begin_inset space ~
43037 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43042 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
43043 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
43044 \begin_inset Newline newline
43047 Since \SpecialChar LyX
43048 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
43052 \begin_layout Description
43053 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
43058 \begin_layout Description
43060 \begin_inset space ~
43063 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
43068 \begin_layout Description
43069 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
43070 's native DVI-format.
43071 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
43073 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
43080 \begin_layout Description
43081 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
43084 \begin_layout Description
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43093 ) DVI-format using the program
43095 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43099 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
43104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
43121 \begin_layout Description
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43126 (cropped) the same as
43130 but with cropped page margins.
43133 \begin_layout Description
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 Dot text file with code in the programming language
43142 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
43147 \begin_layout Description
43152 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43161 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
43169 \begin_layout Description
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43178 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
43183 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
43190 \begin_layout Description
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43203 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43204 source that is compilable with the program
43206 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43210 \begin_layout Description
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43219 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43221 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
43231 \begin_layout Description
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43240 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43242 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
43243 only this format is readable by the
43250 \begin_layout Description
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43263 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43264 source that is compilable with the program
43270 \begin_layout Description
43272 \begin_inset space ~
43276 \begin_inset space ~
43283 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43284 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
43289 \begin_layout Description
43291 \begin_inset space ~
43294 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
43295 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
43297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43301 \begin_inset space \space{}
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43326 represent the version number)
43329 \begin_layout Description
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43338 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
43340 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43345 \begin_layout Description
43346 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
43347 's internal XHTML engine
43350 \begin_layout Description
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43364 \begin_inset space ~
43367 XML Office Open XML file,
43373 For the conversion the program
43382 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43385 \begin_layout Description
43386 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
43391 \begin_layout Description
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43396 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
43406 For the conversion the program
43415 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43418 \begin_layout Description
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43423 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
43424 For the conversion the program
43433 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43436 \begin_layout Description
43438 \begin_inset space ~
43441 (cropped) the same as
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43449 but with cropped page margins
43452 \begin_layout Description
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43461 PDF-format using the program
43466 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43469 \begin_layout Description
43473 \begin_inset space ~
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43490 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
43491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43495 \begin_inset space \space{}
43498 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
43501 \begin_layout Description
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43510 PDF-format using the program
43512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43516 produces PDF-files directly
43519 \begin_layout Description
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43528 PDF-format using the program
43533 produces PDF-files directly
43536 \begin_layout Description
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43545 PDF-format using the program
43550 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43553 \begin_layout Description
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43562 PDF-format using the program
43568 produces PDF-files directly
43571 \begin_layout Description
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_layout Description
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43597 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
43602 \begin_layout Description
43607 PostScript format using the program
43616 options see section
43617 \begin_inset space ~
43621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43623 reference "subsec:General-output"
43631 \begin_layout Description
43632 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43633 source and also code in the statistical programming language
43646 it is possible to use
43650 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
43654 \begin_layout Standard
43655 If one of the menu entries
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43673 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43675 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43684 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43690 \begin_inset Index idx
43695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43696 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43705 \begin_layout Subsection
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43710 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43719 reference "sec:Paths"
43725 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
43734 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
43735 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
43736 's preferences as described in section
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43743 reference "subsec:Converters"
43751 \begin_layout Subsection
43752 New and Close Window
43755 \begin_layout Standard
43756 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43760 \begin_layout Subsection
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
43768 \begin_layout Section
43770 \begin_inset Index idx
43775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43777 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_layout Subsection
43798 \begin_layout Standard
43799 Described in section
43800 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43806 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
43814 \begin_layout Subsection
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43823 Described in section
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43830 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43838 \begin_layout Subsection
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
43844 If the cursor is outside an inset,
43845 the whole document will be selected.
43848 \begin_layout Subsection
43852 \begin_layout Standard
43853 Selects the whole document.
43856 \begin_layout Subsection
43857 Find & Replace (Quick)
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43861 Described in section
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43868 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43876 \begin_layout Subsection
43877 Find & Replace (Advanced)
43880 \begin_layout Standard
43881 Described in section
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43888 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
43896 \begin_layout Subsection
43897 Move Paragraph Up/Down
43900 \begin_layout Standard
43901 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
43904 \begin_layout Subsection
43906 \begin_inset Index idx
43911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43913 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43931 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
43932 line spacing and label width.
43933 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
43936 \begin_layout Standard
43937 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
43943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43954 \begin_layout Subsection
43958 \begin_layout Standard
43959 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
43963 \begin_layout Enumerate
43964 Customize text properties by means of the
43970 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
43974 this is described in section
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43981 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
43989 \begin_layout Enumerate
43990 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
43992 Apply last settings
43995 \begin_layout Enumerate
43996 Change the casing of selected text (
44013 \begin_layout Subsection
44017 \begin_layout Standard
44018 This sub-menu only appears if the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44050 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
44058 \begin_layout Subsection
44059 Table and Rows & Columns
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44063 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
44064 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
44065 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
44068 \begin_layout Subsection
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
44074 It will dissolve this inset.
44075 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
44078 \begin_layout Subsection
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44083 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
44084 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
44087 \begin_layout Subsection
44088 Increase/Decrease List Depth
44091 \begin_layout Standard
44092 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
44093 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44100 reference "sec:Nesting"
44106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44108 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44116 \begin_layout Section
44118 \begin_inset Index idx
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44125 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44142 \begin_layout Standard
44143 At the bottom of the
44147 menu the opened documents are listed.
44150 \begin_layout Subsection
44151 Open/Close all Insets
44154 \begin_layout Standard
44155 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
44158 \begin_layout Subsection
44159 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
44162 \begin_layout Standard
44163 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
44166 \begin_layout Standard
44167 Math macros are described in the
44174 \begin_layout Subsection
44178 \begin_layout Standard
44179 Shows the outline window as described in sections
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44186 reference "sec:Navigating"
44192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44194 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
44202 \begin_layout Subsection
44206 \begin_layout Standard
44207 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
44208 as described in section
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44215 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44223 \begin_layout Subsection
44227 \begin_layout Standard
44228 Opens a window showing console messages.
44229 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
44231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44235 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
44236 is processing the document.
44239 \begin_layout Subsection
44241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44243 name "subsec:Toolbars"
44248 \begin_inset Index idx
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44262 \begin_layout Standard
44263 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
44264 All toolbars and the
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44285 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
44288 \begin_layout Standard
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44329 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
44334 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
44351 \begin_layout Standard
44356 state the toolbar is permanently shown,
44361 state it is never shown;
44366 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
44367 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
44368 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively,
44369 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment.
44372 \begin_layout Standard
44374 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
44375 \begin_inset space ~
44379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44381 reference "sec:Toolbars"
44389 \begin_layout Subsection
44393 \begin_layout Standard
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44422 will split \SpecialChar LyX
44423 's main window vertically while
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44451 will split it horizontally.
44452 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
44453 or to view the same document,
44454 but at different positions.
44455 You can even split the main window several times to view,
44457 three or more documents at the same time.
44458 To close a split view,
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_layout Subsection
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 Closes a split view.
44482 \begin_layout Subsection
44486 \begin_layout Standard
44487 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
44488 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
44489 's main window fullscreen.
44490 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
44492 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
44495 \begin_layout Section
44497 \begin_inset Index idx
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44521 \begin_layout Subsection
44525 \begin_layout Standard
44526 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44533 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
44545 \begin_layout Subsection
44547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44549 name "subsec:Special-Character"
44556 \begin_layout Standard
44557 Here you can insert the following characters:
44560 \begin_layout Description
44565 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44567 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
44568 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44569 -packages you have installed.
44570 You can get a complete display by checking
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44579 \begin_inset Newline newline
44583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44592 Not all characters will be visible in the
44596 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44603 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44608 ) can display every character.
44616 \begin_layout Description
44617 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
44622 \begin_layout Description
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44631 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
44632 \begin_inset space ~
44636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44638 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
44646 \begin_layout Description
44648 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109674
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_inset space ~
44658 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109675
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44666 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109680
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44672 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109681
44675 Inserts this quote:
44677 no matter what quote style you selected in the
44679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44686 \begin_layout Description
44688 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109701
44690 \begin_inset space ~
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44701 Mark Inserts this quote:
44703 \begin_inset Quotes qls
44707 no matter what quote style you have selected.
44710 \begin_layout Description
44712 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109722
44714 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109720
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44722 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109726
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44728 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109727
44732 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109731
44736 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109733
44740 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109738
44741 (usually a single quote)
44743 in the quotation marks style selected in the
44745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44746 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44752 \begin_layout Description
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44757 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that prevents automatic line breaks:
44758 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
44762 \begin_layout Description
44764 \begin_inset space ~
44767 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
44768 \SpecialChar breakableslash
44772 \begin_layout Description
44774 \begin_inset space ~
44777 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
44779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44783 \begin_inset space \space{}
44786 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
44787 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
44794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44797 To insert a fraction use the command
44802 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
44806 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
44812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44815 The visible space is hereby the character before the
44822 \begin_layout Description
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44827 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
44828 \SpecialChar menuseparator
44832 \begin_layout Description
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_inset Index idx
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 \begin_inset Index idx
44855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
44872 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44878 \begin_inset Index idx
44883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44886 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44901 \begin_inset Newline newline
44904 More information about this feature can be found in the
44910 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44916 \begin_layout Description
44917 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
44922 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
44926 \begin_layout Subsection
44930 \begin_layout Standard
44931 Opens a submenu with the following options:
44934 \begin_layout Description
44935 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
44937 \begin_inset script superscript
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 \begin_layout Description
44950 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
44952 \begin_inset script subscript
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 \begin_layout Description
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44968 Space Inserts a non-breaking space as described in section
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44975 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44988 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44995 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
45003 \begin_layout Description
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45008 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
45009 \begin_inset space ~
45013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45015 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
45023 \begin_layout Description
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45028 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45035 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
45043 \begin_layout Description
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45048 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45055 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
45063 \begin_layout Description
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45068 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45075 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
45083 \begin_layout Description
45084 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45091 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45104 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45111 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
45119 \begin_layout Description
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45124 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
45125 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45131 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
45139 \begin_layout Description
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45148 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45156 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
45164 for a usage example.
45167 \begin_layout Description
45169 \begin_inset space ~
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45176 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45183 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 Break Inserts a forced line break that justifies the remaining text as described in section
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45203 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45211 \begin_layout Description
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45216 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45223 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45231 \begin_layout Description
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45236 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
45237 as described in section
45238 \begin_inset space ~
45242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45244 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45252 \begin_layout Description
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45258 \begin_inset space ~
45261 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45262 to prevent a page break at the given position.
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45274 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
45282 \begin_layout Description
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45287 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45294 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45302 \begin_layout Description
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45311 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
45312 \begin_inset space ~
45316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45318 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45326 \begin_layout Subsection
45330 \begin_layout Standard
45331 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
45332 The submenu allows you to insert
45335 \begin_layout Description
45337 \begin_inset space ~
45340 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
45343 \begin_layout Description
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45352 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
45355 \begin_layout Description
45357 \begin_inset space ~
45360 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
45363 \begin_layout Description
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45368 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
45371 \begin_layout Description
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45380 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
45383 \begin_layout Description
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45388 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
45391 \begin_layout Description
45393 \begin_inset space ~
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45404 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
45407 \begin_layout Description
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45416 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
45418 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
45421 \begin_layout Description
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45426 Name inserts the user name as specified in
45428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45429 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45435 \begin_layout Description
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45440 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
45442 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45443 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45449 \begin_layout Description
45450 Other\SpecialChar ldots
45451 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
45454 \begin_layout Subsection
45457 List/Contents/References
45460 \begin_layout Standard
45461 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45489 are described in section
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45496 reference "sec:toc"
45506 is described in section
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45513 reference "sec:Index"
45523 is described in section
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45530 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45537 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45540 is described in section
45541 \begin_inset space ~
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45547 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45555 \begin_layout Subsection
45559 \begin_layout Standard
45561 as described in section
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45568 reference "sec:Floats"
45573 and in detail the chapter
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45588 \begin_layout Subsection
45592 \begin_layout Standard
45594 described in section
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45601 reference "sec:Notes"
45609 \begin_layout Subsection
45613 \begin_layout Standard
45614 Inserts a branch inset,
45616 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
45617 Branches are described in section
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45624 reference "sec:Branches"
45632 \begin_layout Subsection
45636 \begin_layout Standard
45637 Inserts document class-specific insets.
45638 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
45639 An example is the document class
45643 with three custom insets.
45646 Flex insets and InsetLayout
45650 Installing New Document Classes,
45651 The Layout file format
45657 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
45660 \begin_layout Subsection
45662 \begin_inset Index idx
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45677 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
45678 For more information see chapter
45680 External Document Parts
45683 \begin_inset space ~
45689 \begin_layout Subsection
45691 \begin_inset Index idx
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \begin_layout Standard
45706 Inserts a box in a certain style.
45707 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
45714 \begin_inset space ~
45722 \begin_layout Subsection
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45731 dialog as described in section
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45738 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45746 \begin_layout Subsection
45750 \begin_layout Standard
45755 as described in section
45756 \begin_inset space ~
45760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45762 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45770 \begin_layout Subsection
45774 \begin_layout Standard
45779 as described in section
45780 \begin_inset space ~
45784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45786 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45794 \begin_layout Subsection
45796 \begin_inset Index idx
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 \begin_inset Index idx
45813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45825 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45842 \begin_layout Standard
45843 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
45844 Floats are described in section
45845 \begin_inset space ~
45849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45851 reference "sec:Floats"
45857 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
45859 Multi-page Table Captions
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45872 \begin_layout Subsection
45876 \begin_layout Standard
45877 Inserts an index entry as described in section
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45884 reference "sec:Index"
45892 \begin_layout Subsection
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45897 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
45898 \begin_inset space ~
45902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45904 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45912 \begin_layout Subsection
45916 \begin_layout Standard
45917 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
45918 Tables are described in section
45919 \begin_inset space ~
45923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45925 reference "sec:Tables"
45930 and in detail in the chapter
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45945 \begin_layout Subsection
45949 \begin_layout Standard
45955 Graphics are described in section
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45962 reference "sec:Graphics"
45970 \begin_layout Subsection
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45975 Inserts a URL as described in section
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45982 reference "subsec:URLs"
45990 \begin_layout Subsection
45994 \begin_layout Standard
45995 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
45996 \begin_inset space ~
46000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46002 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
46010 \begin_layout Subsection
46014 \begin_layout Standard
46015 Inserts a footnote as described in section
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46022 reference "sec:Footnotes"
46030 \begin_layout Subsection
46034 \begin_layout Standard
46035 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
46036 \begin_inset space ~
46040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46042 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
46050 \begin_layout Subsection
46053 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
46056 \begin_layout Standard
46057 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
46059 \begin_inset space ~
46063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46065 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
46070 for an explanation.
46073 \begin_layout Subsection
46077 \begin_layout Standard
46078 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
46079 in or behind a section heading,
46080 title or caption of a float.
46081 Inserts a short title as described in section
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46088 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
46096 \begin_layout Subsection
46101 \begin_layout Standard
46102 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
46103 Code box as described in section
46104 \begin_inset space ~
46108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46110 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
46118 \begin_layout Subsection
46120 \begin_inset Index idx
46125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46134 \begin_layout Standard
46135 Inserts a program listings box.
46136 Program listings are explained in the chapter
46138 Program Code Listings
46143 \begin_inset space ~
46151 \begin_layout Subsection
46155 \begin_layout Standard
46156 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
46157 \begin_inset space ~
46161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46163 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46171 \begin_layout Section
46173 \begin_inset Index idx
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46197 \begin_layout Standard
46198 This menu lists the existing chapters,
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46206 of the current document.
46207 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
46210 \begin_layout Subsection
46214 \begin_layout Standard
46215 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
46216 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
46219 \begin_inset space ~
46223 To create bookmarks for this example,
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46228 2.5 and use the submenu
46231 \begin_inset space ~
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46248 \begin_inset space ~
46252 \begin_inset space ~
46258 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
46261 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
46267 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
46270 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
46273 \begin_layout Standard
46277 \begin_inset space ~
46282 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
46285 \begin_inset space ~
46290 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
46293 \begin_layout Subsection
46299 \begin_layout Standard
46300 Jump to the next note,
46302 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
46305 \begin_layout Subsection
46309 \begin_layout Standard
46310 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
46311 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
46312 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
46315 \begin_inset space ~
46319 \begin_inset space ~
46327 \begin_layout Subsection
46331 \begin_layout Standard
46332 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
46335 The \SpecialChar LyX
46336 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
46338 \begin_inset space ~
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46351 manual for a detailed description.
46354 \begin_layout Section
46356 \begin_inset Index idx
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 \begin_layout Subsection
46384 \begin_layout Standard
46385 Change Tracking is described in section
46386 \begin_inset space ~
46390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46392 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46400 \begin_layout Subsection
46408 \begin_layout Standard
46409 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
46410 by viewing or exporting a document,
46411 this menu will be enabled.
46412 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46414 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
46416 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
46417 \begin_inset Newline newline
46420 With the help of the logfile,
46421 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46425 \begin_layout Standard
46428 Open Containing Directory
46430 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
46431 's temporary folder for the document.
46432 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
46433 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
46434 For example some journals require to send the
46438 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46442 \begin_layout Subsection
46443 Start Appendix Here
46446 \begin_layout Standard
46447 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
46448 \begin_inset space ~
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46454 reference "sec:Appendices"
46462 \begin_layout Subsection
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46470 \begin_layout Standard
46471 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
46473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46474 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46475 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46481 \begin_inset space ~
46488 \begin_inset space ~
46492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46494 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46499 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
46502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46503 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46508 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46510 \begin_inset space ~
46513 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46519 \begin_inset space ~
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46532 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46537 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
46538 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46540 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46541 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46543 \begin_inset space ~
46546 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46551 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46556 \begin_inset space ~
46560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46562 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46568 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46569 when it is first configured.
46570 The default output format is
46573 \begin_inset space ~
46581 \begin_layout Subsection
46582 View (Other Formats)
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46586 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
46587 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
46588 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
46589 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46590 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
46592 All possible formats are listed in section
46593 \begin_inset space ~
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46599 reference "subsec:Export"
46605 You should at least see the menu entry
46611 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46613 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
46615 \begin_inset space ~
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46621 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
46627 \begin_inset Index idx
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46633 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46643 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
46644 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46646 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46647 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46652 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46654 \begin_inset space ~
46657 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46662 \begin_inset space ~
46666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46668 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46674 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46675 when it is first configured.
46678 \begin_layout Subsection
46680 \begin_inset space ~
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46687 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
46690 \begin_layout Subsection
46691 Update (Other Formats)
46694 \begin_layout Standard
46695 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
46698 \begin_layout Subsection
46699 View Master Document
46702 \begin_layout Standard
46703 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46719 \begin_inset space ~
46724 manual for more information on this topic).
46725 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
46727 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
46731 \begin_inset space ~
46735 \begin_inset space ~
46740 generates the output of the whole book,
46745 will just output the chapter alone.
46748 \begin_layout Standard
46749 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46753 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46772 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46777 ) or in the preferences (menu
46779 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46780 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46785 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46790 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46792 \begin_inset space ~
46796 \begin_inset space ~
46803 \begin_inset space ~
46807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46809 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46817 \begin_layout Subsection
46818 Update Master Document
46821 \begin_layout Standard
46822 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46838 \begin_inset space ~
46843 manual for more information on this topic).
46844 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46848 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46851 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46852 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46858 \begin_inset space ~
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46871 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46876 ) or in the preferences (menu
46878 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46879 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46884 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46889 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46891 \begin_inset space ~
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46908 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46916 \begin_layout Subsection
46918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46920 name "subsec:Compressed"
46927 \begin_layout Standard
46928 Un/compresses the current document.
46929 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
46931 Additional Features
46933 manual for details).
46936 \begin_layout Subsection
46940 \begin_layout Standard
46941 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
46944 \begin_layout Subsection
46948 \begin_layout Standard
46949 The document settings are described in appendix
46950 \begin_inset space ~
46954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46956 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46964 \begin_layout Section
46966 \begin_inset Index idx
46971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 \begin_layout Subsection
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46995 Spell checking is explained in section
46996 \begin_inset space ~
47000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47002 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47010 \begin_layout Subsection
47014 \begin_layout Standard
47015 The thesaurus is described in section
47016 \begin_inset space ~
47020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47022 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
47030 \begin_layout Subsection
47032 \begin_inset Index idx
47037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47044 \begin_inset Index idx
47049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47058 \begin_layout Standard
47059 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
47062 \begin_layout Subsection
47068 \begin_inset Index idx
47073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47074 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47083 \begin_layout Standard
47084 Generates with the help of the program
47086 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47089 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
47090 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
47091 This feature is not available on Windows.
47094 \begin_layout Subsection
47100 \begin_inset Index idx
47105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47115 \begin_layout Standard
47116 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47121 \begin_inset space ~
47126 to see the full filename paths.
47129 \begin_layout Subsection
47131 \begin_inset Index idx
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47145 \begin_layout Standard
47146 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
47147 files as described in section
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47154 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47162 \begin_layout Subsection
47164 \begin_inset Index idx
47169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47182 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47186 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47198 \begin_inset Index idx
47203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47213 \begin_layout Standard
47214 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
47218 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47219 -packages and programs it needs;
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47227 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47235 \begin_layout Subsection
47239 \begin_layout Standard
47244 dialog as described in detail in appendix
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47251 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47259 \begin_layout Section
47261 \begin_inset Index idx
47266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 \begin_layout Standard
47286 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
47287 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
47289 If a file is not available in this language,
47290 the English version will be listed.
47293 \begin_layout Standard
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47302 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
47303 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47304 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
47306 \begin_inset space ~
47310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47312 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
47320 \begin_layout Standard
47324 \begin_inset space ~
47329 gives information about the copyright,
47330 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
47331 version you are using.
47334 \begin_layout Section
47336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47338 name "sec:Toolbars"
47345 \begin_layout Standard
47346 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
47347 \begin_inset space ~
47351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47353 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47362 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
47363 This is described in the
47365 Additional Features
47370 \begin_layout Subsection
47372 \begin_inset Index idx
47377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47396 \begin_layout Standard
47397 \begin_inset Graphics
47398 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
47406 \begin_layout Standard
47407 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47413 \begin_layout Standard
47414 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
47418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47430 \begin_inset Note Note
47433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47434 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
47439 manual for more information.
47447 \begin_layout Standard
47448 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47454 \begin_layout Standard
47455 \begin_inset Tabular
47456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
47457 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47459 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47465 \begin_inset Graphics
47466 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
47476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47480 pull-down box for the environments
47493 \begin_layout Standard
47494 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
47500 \begin_layout Standard
47502 \begin_inset Tabular
47503 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
47504 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47505 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47506 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47530 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47560 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47590 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47606 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
47614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47620 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47636 arg "spelling-continuously"
47644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47648 Spellcheck continuously
47654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47677 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47707 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47737 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47767 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47818 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
47826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47858 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
47866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47872 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47900 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
47908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47914 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47915 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
47922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47947 arg "dialog-show character"
47956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47977 Set text to noun style,
47981 arg "dialog-show character"
47990 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47997 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
48005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48062 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48064 \begin_inset space ~
48073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48082 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
48090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48110 arg "tabular-insert"
48118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48138 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
48146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48168 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
48176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48180 Toggle outline window on/off,
48183 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48199 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
48207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48211 Toggle math toolbar on/off
48217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
48234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48238 Toggle table toolbar on/off
48251 \begin_layout Subsection
48253 \begin_inset Index idx
48258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48260 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 \begin_layout Standard
48278 \begin_inset Graphics
48279 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
48287 \begin_layout Standard
48288 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48294 \begin_layout Standard
48295 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
48298 \begin_layout Standard
48299 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48305 \begin_layout Standard
48306 \begin_inset Tabular
48307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
48308 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48309 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48310 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48347 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
48355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
48382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48401 arg "layout-toggle List"
48409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 arg "layout-toggle Description"
48436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48455 arg "depth-increment"
48463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48471 \begin_inset space ~
48475 \begin_inset space ~
48484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48493 arg "depth-decrement"
48501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48509 \begin_inset space ~
48513 \begin_inset space ~
48522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48531 arg "float-insert figure"
48539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48546 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 arg "float-insert table"
48570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48577 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48623 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
48631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48653 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
48661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48699 \begin_inset space ~
48708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48717 arg "nomencl-insert"
48725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48733 \begin_inset space ~
48742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48751 arg "footnote-insert"
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 arg "marginalnote-insert"
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48797 \begin_inset space ~
48806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48830 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
48832 \begin_inset space ~
48841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 arg "box-insert Frameless"
48858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48926 \begin_inset space ~
48935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48944 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48959 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48975 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
48983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48990 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48992 \begin_inset space ~
49001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49010 arg "dialog-show character"
49018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49024 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49026 \begin_inset space ~
49029 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
49036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49045 arg "textstyle-apply"
49053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 Format text using the recent settings in the
49060 arg "dialog-show character"
49069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49078 arg "layout-paragraph"
49086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49094 \begin_inset space ~
49103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49112 arg "thesaurus-entry"
49120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49126 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49140 \begin_layout Subsection
49141 View/Update Toolbar
49142 \begin_inset Index idx
49147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49149 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49166 \begin_layout Standard
49167 \begin_inset Graphics
49168 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
49175 \begin_layout Standard
49176 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49182 \begin_layout Standard
49183 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
49186 \begin_layout Standard
49187 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49193 \begin_layout Standard
49194 \begin_inset Tabular
49195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
49196 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49238 arg "buffer-update"
49246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49268 arg "master-buffer-view"
49276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49284 \begin_inset space ~
49288 \begin_inset space ~
49297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49306 arg "master-buffer-update"
49314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49322 \begin_inset space ~
49326 \begin_inset space ~
49335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49344 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
49352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49359 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49360 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49361 Synchronize with Output
49367 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49389 View (Other Formats)
49395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 arg "update-others"
49410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49417 Update (Other Formats)
49430 \begin_layout Subsection
49434 \begin_layout Standard
49435 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
49436 \begin_inset space ~
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49442 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49449 \begin_inset Index idx
49454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49456 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49473 \begin_inset space ~
49478 manual and the math macro toolbar
49479 \begin_inset Index idx
49484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49486 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49507 \begin_layout Chapter
49508 The Document Settings
49509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49511 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
49516 \begin_inset Index idx
49521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49523 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 \begin_layout Standard
49544 \begin_inset space ~
49549 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
49551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49555 You can save your document settings as default with the
49557 Save as Document Defaults
49559 button in any dialog.
49560 This will create a template named
49564 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
49565 when you create a new document without using a template.
49568 \begin_layout Standard
49573 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
49574 This affects mostly class options,
49575 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
49578 \begin_layout Standard
49579 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
49580 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
49581 To find a setting quicker,
49582 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
49584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49588 \begin_inset space \space{}
49592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49600 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
49601 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
49602 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
49605 \begin_layout Section
49609 \begin_layout Standard
49610 Here you set the document class,
49613 and a master document.
49614 Document classes are described in section
49615 \begin_inset space ~
49619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49621 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
49629 \begin_layout Standard
49633 \begin_inset space ~
49638 you can load you own layout-file,
49639 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
49644 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
49645 as a layout for a document class.
49646 For more about layout-files,
49649 Installing New Document Classes,
49650 Types of Layout Files
49659 \begin_layout Standard
49660 Some classes use special class options by default.
49661 If this is the case,
49662 they are listed in the field
49666 and you can decide to use them or not.
49667 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
49668 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
49673 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49675 color and page layout packages.
49681 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49683 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
49687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49688 When you want to use one of the following drivers
49689 \begin_inset Newline newline
49703 \begin_inset Newline newline
49706 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49715 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
49728 \begin_layout Standard
49733 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
49734 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
49735 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
49736 This way child documents are always compilable.
49737 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
49744 \begin_inset space ~
49752 \begin_layout Standard
49753 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49763 \begin_inset Index idx
49768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49771 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 \begin_inset Index idx
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49808 for cross-references,
49810 \begin_inset space ~
49814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49816 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49824 \begin_layout Section
49828 \begin_layout Standard
49829 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
49830 Please refer to the section
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49841 \begin_inset space ~
49846 manual for details.
49849 \begin_layout Section
49853 \begin_layout Standard
49854 Modules are explained in section
49855 \begin_inset space ~
49859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49861 reference "subsec:Modules"
49869 \begin_layout Section
49873 \begin_layout Standard
49875 \begin_inset space ~
49879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49881 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
49889 \begin_layout Section
49893 \begin_layout Standard
49894 The document font settings are described in section
49895 \begin_inset space ~
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49901 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
49909 \begin_layout Section
49913 \begin_layout Standard
49914 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
49926 \begin_inset space ~
49931 and whether it should be a
49934 \begin_inset space ~
49939 can also be specified here.
49942 \begin_layout Standard
49943 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
49944 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
49945 That would be impractical,
49947 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
49949 it will be as you specified in the output.
49952 \begin_layout Standard
49955 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
49958 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
49959 justifies the text on screen.
49960 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
49964 \begin_layout Standard
49973 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
49976 \begin_layout Section
49980 \begin_layout Standard
49981 This dialog is described in sections
49982 \begin_inset space ~
49986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49988 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
49994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49996 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
50004 \begin_layout Section
50008 \begin_layout Standard
50009 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
50010 \begin_inset space ~
50014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50016 reference "subsec:Margins"
50024 \begin_layout Section
50026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50028 name "sec:Language-encodings"
50033 \begin_inset Index idx
50038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50040 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50057 \begin_layout Standard
50058 The document language and quote styles are set here.
50059 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50060 (the \SpecialChar LyX
50061 file is always encoded in utf8).
50062 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
50063 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
50064 -command is not known for a particular character).
50067 \begin_layout Standard
50070 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50071 files in Unicode – or utf8,
50072 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
50073 's default encoding).
50074 This should normally fit your needs,
50075 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
50076 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
50077 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
50078 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
50080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50088 encodings is necessary.
50091 \begin_layout Standard
50093 provides support for these traditional encodings.
50096 Traditional (auto-selected)
50104 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).If the document contains text in more than one language you thus may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50109 \begin_layout Standard
50111 you can also select
50116 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
50117 Note that this encoding is then used for
50122 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
50125 \begin_layout Standard
50130 selection in the next dropdown menu does what it states:
50131 it prevents \SpecialChar LyX
50132 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50138 \begin_inset Index idx
50143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50146 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
50163 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
50165 Note that this option is only available for the standard
50171 Traditional (auto-selected)
50176 \begin_layout Standard
50180 \begin_inset space ~
50185 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50186 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
50187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50195 The possible settings are:
50198 \begin_layout Description
50199 Default uses the language package that is selected in
50201 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50202 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50206 \begin_inset space ~
50210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50212 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50220 \begin_layout Description
50221 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
50222 In many cases this will be
50227 \begin_inset Index idx
50232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50235 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50250 If the newer package
50255 \begin_inset Index idx
50260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50263 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50277 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50278 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50279 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
50281 this package will be used instead of
50288 \begin_layout Description
50290 \begin_inset space ~
50301 would be more appropriate.
50304 \begin_layout Description
50305 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
50306 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
50310 (for German texts),
50314 \begin_inset Newline newline
50319 usepackage{ngerman}
50322 \begin_layout Description
50323 None will not use a language package.
50324 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
50327 \begin_layout Standard
50328 Here is a list with the important encodings:
50331 \begin_layout Description
50332 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
50333 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
50335 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
50337 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
50338 -commands are needed.
50341 \begin_layout Description
50343 \begin_inset space ~
50347 \begin_inset space ~
50350 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
50353 \begin_layout Description
50355 \begin_inset space ~
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50362 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
50365 \begin_layout Description
50367 \begin_inset space ~
50370 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
50373 \begin_layout Description
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50379 \begin_inset space ~
50382 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
50383 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50384 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50387 \begin_layout Description
50389 \begin_inset space ~
50393 \begin_inset space ~
50396 8859-13) for Estonian,
50397 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50398 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
50401 \begin_layout Description
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50407 \begin_inset space ~
50410 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
50411 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50412 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50415 \begin_layout Description
50417 \begin_inset space ~
50421 \begin_inset space ~
50425 \begin_inset space ~
50428 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
50429 \begin_inset space ~
50435 \begin_layout Description
50437 \begin_inset space ~
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50445 \begin_inset space ~
50448 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
50455 Slovak and Slovenian
50458 \begin_layout Description
50460 \begin_inset space ~
50464 \begin_inset space ~
50467 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
50468 used especially on UNIX OSes,
50469 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50470 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50471 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50472 \begin_inset space ~
50476 \begin_inset space ~
50482 \begin_layout Description
50484 \begin_inset space ~
50488 \begin_inset space ~
50491 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
50492 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
50493 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50494 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50495 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50496 \begin_inset space ~
50500 \begin_inset space ~
50506 \begin_layout Description
50508 \begin_inset space ~
50512 \begin_inset space ~
50515 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
50518 \begin_layout Description
50520 \begin_inset space ~
50524 \begin_inset space ~
50527 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
50530 \begin_layout Description
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50536 \begin_inset space ~
50539 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
50542 Serbian and Ukrainian
50545 \begin_layout Description
50547 \begin_inset space ~
50550 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
50553 \begin_layout Description
50555 \begin_inset space ~
50558 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
50561 \begin_layout Description
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50567 \begin_inset space ~
50570 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
50573 \begin_layout Description
50575 \begin_inset space ~
50579 \begin_inset space ~
50585 \begin_layout Description
50587 \begin_inset space ~
50591 \begin_inset space ~
50594 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
50595 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
50598 \begin_layout Description
50600 \begin_inset space ~
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50610 \begin_layout Description
50612 \begin_inset space ~
50616 \begin_inset space ~
50619 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50620 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50626 \begin_inset Index idx
50631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50634 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50650 set the document language to
50655 \begin_layout Description
50657 \begin_inset space ~
50661 \begin_inset space ~
50664 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50665 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50672 set the document language to
50675 \begin_inset space ~
50681 \begin_layout Description
50683 \begin_inset space ~
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50690 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50691 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50697 \begin_inset Index idx
50702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50721 set the document language to
50726 \begin_layout Description
50728 \begin_inset space ~
50732 \begin_inset space ~
50735 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50736 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50743 set the document language to
50748 \begin_layout Description
50750 \begin_inset space ~
50754 \begin_inset space ~
50757 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
50758 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50765 set the document language to
50770 \begin_layout Description
50772 \begin_inset space ~
50775 (EUC-KR) for Korean
50778 \begin_layout Description
50780 \begin_inset space ~
50784 \begin_inset space ~
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50791 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
50793 Maltese and Turkish
50796 \begin_layout Description
50798 \begin_inset space ~
50802 \begin_inset space ~
50806 \begin_inset space ~
50809 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
50818 Romanian and Slovenian,
50819 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
50822 \begin_layout Description
50824 \begin_inset space ~
50828 \begin_inset space ~
50834 \begin_layout Description
50836 \begin_inset space ~
50840 \begin_inset space ~
50843 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
50844 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
50847 \begin_layout Description
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50853 \begin_inset space ~
50856 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50862 \begin_inset Index idx
50867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50870 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50884 (for the languages Chinese,
50885 Japanese and Korean).
50886 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50887 with the default encoding (
50889 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50895 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
50896 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50899 \begin_layout Description
50901 \begin_inset space ~
50909 \begin_inset space ~
50912 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
50919 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50923 which use Unicode directly,
50924 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50931 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50932 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50934 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50937 \begin_layout Description
50939 \begin_inset space ~
50943 \begin_inset space ~
50946 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50952 \begin_inset Index idx
50957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50960 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50976 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
50977 This used to be more comprehensive than
50980 \begin_inset space ~
50986 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
50989 \begin_layout Description
50991 \begin_inset space ~
50994 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51000 \begin_inset Index idx
51005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51008 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51023 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
51024 with the default encoding (
51026 Unicode (utf8) [default]
51032 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
51033 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
51036 \begin_layout Description
51038 \begin_inset space ~
51042 \begin_inset space ~
51046 \begin_inset space ~
51049 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
51050 \begin_inset space ~
51056 \begin_layout Description
51058 \begin_inset space ~
51062 \begin_inset space ~
51066 \begin_inset space ~
51069 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
51084 Spanish and Swedish;
51085 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
51088 \begin_layout Description
51090 \begin_inset space ~
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51098 \begin_inset space ~
51101 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
51102 but with the Euro currency sign,
51103 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
51106 \begin_layout Section
51108 \begin_inset Index idx
51113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51115 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51130 \begin_inset Index idx
51135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51137 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51152 \begin_inset Index idx
51157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51159 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51174 \begin_inset Index idx
51179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51198 \begin_layout Standard
51199 Here you can alter the font color for the
51208 \begin_inset space ~
51214 light grey)for the background color for the
51222 \begin_inset space ~
51233 sets the color back to the default.
51236 \begin_layout Standard
51237 Clicking any button showing
51245 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
51246 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
51249 \begin_layout Standard
51254 \begin_inset space ~
51259 font color and use the option
51262 \begin_inset space ~
51267 in the document settings under
51270 \begin_inset space ~
51276 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
51277 \begin_inset space ~
51281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51283 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51291 \begin_layout Standard
51292 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
51298 \begin_layout Standard
51302 \begin_inset space ~
51311 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
51313 \begin_inset space ~
51316 Code after a forced page break:
51319 \begin_layout Itemize
51320 For the page color:
51321 \begin_inset Newline newline
51328 pagecolor{color name}
51331 \begin_layout Itemize
51332 For the text color:
51333 \begin_inset Newline newline
51343 \begin_layout Standard
51344 You are restricted to one of
51386 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
51393 \begin_inset space ~
51399 \begin_inset Newline newline
51402 If you have changed a text or background color,
51403 you can use the following names to refer to them:
51406 \begin_layout Itemize
51412 \begin_inset Newline newline
51417 page_backgroundcolor
51420 \begin_layout Itemize
51424 \begin_inset space ~
51430 \begin_inset Newline newline
51438 \begin_layout Itemize
51442 \begin_inset space ~
51448 \begin_inset Newline newline
51456 \begin_layout Itemize
51460 \begin_inset space ~
51466 \begin_inset Newline newline
51474 \begin_layout Standard
51475 To see how to define and use custom colors,
51479 \begin_inset space ~
51487 \begin_inset space ~
51495 \begin_layout Section
51499 \begin_layout Standard
51500 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
51501 \begin_inset space ~
51505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51507 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51516 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
51517 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
51520 \begin_layout Standard
51522 you can advise \SpecialChar LyX
51523 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
51524 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
51527 \begin_layout Section
51531 \begin_layout Standard
51532 Here you can adjust the
51536 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
51540 as described in section
51541 \begin_inset space ~
51545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51547 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
51555 \begin_layout Standard
51556 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
51557 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
51558 The most common one are:
51561 \begin_layout Description
51562 right Line numbers to the right margin
51565 \begin_layout Description
51566 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
51570 \begin_layout Description
51571 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
51574 \begin_layout Description
51575 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
51578 \begin_layout Description
51579 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
51582 \begin_layout Description
51584 \begin_inset space ~
51587 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
51590 \begin_layout Section
51594 \begin_layout Standard
51595 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51601 \begin_inset Index idx
51606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51609 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51629 \begin_inset Index idx
51634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51637 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51656 \begin_inset Index idx
51661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51683 Sectioned bibliography
51685 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51691 \begin_inset Index idx
51696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51719 you can select the style files and specify further options.
51721 you can select a document-specific
51725 for the generation of the bibliography.
51726 For a further description of these possibilities see section
51727 \begin_inset space ~
51731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51733 reference "sec:Bibliography"
51741 \begin_layout Section
51745 \begin_layout Standard
51746 Here you can define the
51750 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
51751 \begin_inset space ~
51755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51757 reference "sec:Index"
51765 \begin_layout Section
51769 \begin_layout Standard
51770 The PDF properties are explained in section
51771 \begin_inset space ~
51775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51777 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51785 \begin_layout Section
51789 \begin_layout Standard
51790 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
51791 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51797 \begin_inset Index idx
51802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51825 \begin_inset Index idx
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51853 \begin_inset Index idx
51858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51861 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51881 \begin_inset Index idx
51886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51909 \begin_inset Index idx
51914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51937 \begin_inset Index idx
51942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51945 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51965 \begin_inset Index idx
51970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51993 \begin_inset Index idx
51998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52001 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52021 \begin_inset Index idx
52026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52029 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52048 \begin_inset Index idx
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52071 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
52074 \begin_layout Description
52075 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
52076 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52077 -errors in formulas,
52078 ensure that you have this enabled.
52081 \begin_layout Description
52082 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
52083 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52084 -errors in formulas,
52085 ensure that you have this enabled.
52088 \begin_layout Description
52089 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
52093 \begin_inset space ~
52105 \begin_layout Description
52106 esint is used for special integral characters,
52110 \begin_inset space ~
52122 \begin_layout Description
52123 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
52135 \begin_layout Description
52136 mathtools is used for the math commands
52177 and labeled arrows,
52178 see the corresponding sections in the
52185 \begin_layout Description
52186 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
52189 Chemical Symbols and Equations
52198 \begin_layout Description
52199 stackrel is used for the math command
52217 \begin_layout Description
52218 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
52221 \begin_layout Description
52222 undertilde is used for the math command
52231 Accents for one Character
52240 \begin_layout Section
52244 \begin_layout Standard
52245 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
52248 \begin_layout Standard
52249 Details are described in the section
52252 \begin_inset space ~
52260 \begin_inset space ~
52268 \begin_layout Section
52272 \begin_layout Standard
52273 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
52275 Program Code Listings
52280 \begin_inset space ~
52288 \begin_layout Section
52292 \begin_layout Standard
52293 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
52302 set to be used and set the
52307 The itemize environment is described in section
52308 \begin_inset space ~
52312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52314 reference "sec:Itemize"
52322 \begin_layout Standard
52323 You can furthermore specify a
52326 \begin_inset space ~
52331 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52332 command of the desired character.
52333 For example to use the € sign,
52334 you have to insert the command
52341 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
52343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52347 \begin_inset space \space{}
52351 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
52361 To find the command for a math symbol,
52362 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
52365 \begin_layout Standard
52366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52375 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52376 -packages in the preamble (menu
52378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52379 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52382 \begin_inset space ~
52388 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
52392 usepackage{textcomp}
52395 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
52399 usepackage{amssymb}
52409 \begin_layout Section
52413 \begin_layout Standard
52414 Branches are described in section
52415 \begin_inset space ~
52419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52421 reference "sec:Branches"
52429 \begin_layout Section
52431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52433 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
52440 \begin_layout Standard
52441 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
52444 \begin_layout Description
52446 \begin_inset space ~
52451 Save transient properties
52453 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
52454 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
52458 \begin_layout Itemize
52459 the activation of change tracking
52462 \begin_layout Itemize
52463 the output of tracked changes
52466 \begin_layout Itemize
52467 the recording of the document directory path.
52470 \begin_layout Standard
52471 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
52475 \begin_layout Description
52477 \begin_inset space ~
52481 \begin_inset space ~
52485 The format that is used when you enter
52486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52507 View Master Document
52508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52515 Update Master Document
52516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52523 menu or the toolbar.
52524 The default is set in
52526 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52527 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52529 \begin_inset space ~
52532 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
52537 \begin_inset space ~
52541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52543 reference "sec:File-Formats"
52551 \begin_layout Description
52553 \begin_inset space ~
52557 \begin_inset space ~
52560 Options offers settings for the
52568 \begin_layout Itemize
52571 Synchronize with Output
52576 \begin_inset space ~
52581 and allows to customize the macro used in this process (for a detailed description see section
52583 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52588 \begin_inset space ~
52596 \begin_layout Itemize
52599 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
52601 determines whether so-called
52602 \begin_inset Quotes els
52606 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52610 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
52611 \begin_inset Quotes els
52615 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52618 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
52619 (such as sections or captions),
52620 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
52622 This setting is on by default,
52623 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
52625 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
52626 you can uncheck this.
52627 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
52629 just leave it checked.
52633 \begin_layout Description
52635 \begin_inset space ~
52639 \begin_inset space ~
52642 Options offers settings for the export format
52650 \begin_inset space ~
52655 will assure that the output follows exactly version
52656 \begin_inset space ~
52659 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
52663 \begin_inset space ~
52668 settings are described in detail in section
52670 Math Output in XHTML
52675 \begin_inset space ~
52684 \begin_inset space ~
52688 \begin_inset space ~
52693 is used for the size of equations in the output.
52696 \begin_layout Description
52698 \begin_inset space ~
52702 \begin_inset space ~
52705 Options offers settings for the export format
52708 The details for the options are described in the chapter
52714 Additional Features
52719 \begin_layout Description
52723 \begin_layout Description
52725 \begin_inset space ~
52729 \begin_inset space ~
52733 \begin_inset space ~
52736 programs If this is switched on,
52742 option which is needed with some packages.
52743 Note that this comes with security risks,
52744 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
52747 \begin_layout Section
52755 \begin_layout Standard
52756 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52757 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
52759 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52761 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
52764 \begin_layout Standard
52765 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52766 -syntax is given in section
52767 \begin_inset space ~
52771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52773 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
52781 \begin_layout Chapter
52787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52789 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52794 \begin_inset Index idx
52799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52808 \begin_layout Standard
52809 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
52811 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52815 It has the following submenus.
52818 \begin_layout Section
52822 \begin_layout Subsection
52826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52827 User Interface File
52828 \begin_inset Index idx
52833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52850 \begin_inset Index idx
52855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52874 \begin_layout Standard
52875 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
52876 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
52884 \begin_layout Description
52889 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
52892 \begin_layout Description
52899 the menu entries in popup context menus
52902 \begin_layout Description
52907 specifies the toolbar buttons
52910 \begin_layout Standard
52911 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
52912 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
52915 \begin_layout Standard
52916 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
52930 entries must be finished with an explicit
52960 and in the case of the
52961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52973 The syntax for the entries is:
52976 \begin_layout Standard
52977 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53006 \begin_layout Standard
53008 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53011 All the \SpecialChar LyX
53012 -functions are listed in the menu
53014 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
53016 \begin_inset space ~
53024 \begin_layout Standard
53025 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53031 \begin_layout Standard
53033 assuming you use the menu
53035 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53038 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
53039 you can add the line
53042 \begin_layout Standard
53043 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53067 \begin_layout Standard
53069 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53084 to have the sixth bookmark.
53087 \begin_layout Standard
53091 \begin_inset space ~
53096 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
53097 's toolbar buttons.
53098 The currently available icon sets are compared in
53099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53102 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
53110 \begin_layout Standard
53114 \begin_inset space ~
53118 \begin_inset space ~
53123 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
53124 's user interface control elements.
53125 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
53126 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
53127 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
53128 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
53131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53135 \begin_layout Standard
53138 Enable tool tips in main work area
53140 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
53143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53147 \begin_layout Standard
53152 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
53153 should display in the menu
53155 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53157 \begin_inset space ~
53165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53169 \begin_layout Standard
53170 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
53175 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
53176 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
53177 the text then appears centered.
53180 \begin_layout Subsection
53184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53188 \begin_layout Standard
53191 Restore window layouts and geometries
53194 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53198 \begin_layout Standard
53201 Restore cursor positions
53203 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
53206 \begin_layout Standard
53209 Load opened files from last session
53211 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53215 \begin_layout Standard
53218 Clear all session information
53220 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
53221 sessions (cursor positions,
53222 names of last opened documents,
53226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53230 name "subsec:Backup documents"
53235 \begin_inset Index idx
53240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53259 \begin_layout Standard
53262 Backup original documents when saving
53264 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was saved the last time.
53265 It is stored in the
53268 \begin_inset space ~
53274 \begin_inset space ~
53278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53280 reference "sec:Paths"
53285 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
53288 \begin_inset space ~
53294 The backup file has the file extension
53298 and the same name than the original file.
53302 \begin_inset space ~
53308 the file has the full path in its file name,
53310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53325 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
53330 \begin_layout Standard
53333 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
53336 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
53337 These files which are stored as
53341 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
53342 Should \SpecialChar LyX
53343 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
53344 this file can be used as a resort.
53347 \begin_layout Standard
53348 Please read section
53349 \begin_inset space ~
53353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53355 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
53359 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
53360 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
53363 \begin_layout Standard
53366 Save documents compressed by default
53368 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
53369 \begin_inset space ~
53373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53375 reference "subsec:Compressed"
53381 This applies to newly created documents only.
53382 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
53385 \begin_layout Standard
53388 Save the document directory path
53390 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
53392 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
53393 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
53396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53397 Windows & work area
53400 \begin_layout Standard
53403 Open documents in tabs
53406 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53410 \begin_layout Standard
53415 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
53420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53422 \begin_inset space ~
53426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53428 reference "sec:Paths"
53433 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
53442 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53444 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
53445 instance is created for each file.
53448 \begin_layout Standard
53451 Single close-tab button
53454 there will only be one close button (
53464 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
53465 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
53466 Regardless of this option,
53467 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
53470 \begin_layout Standard
53471 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53480 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
53481 before the change takes effect.
53489 \begin_layout Standard
53494 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
53495 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
53497 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53501 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
53502 and only want to close the view in once instance.
53505 \begin_layout Subsection
53507 \begin_inset Index idx
53512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53514 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53531 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
53538 \begin_layout Standard
53539 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
53543 \begin_layout Standard
53544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53553 This section only deals with the fonts
53557 the \SpecialChar LyX
53559 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
53560 and set in the menu
53562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53574 \begin_layout Standard
53594 (depends on the system) as its
53597 \begin_inset space ~
53613 \begin_layout Standard
53614 You can change the font size with the
53621 \begin_layout Standard
53626 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
53628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53631 points have the size of 1
53632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53637 \begin_inset space ~
53641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53643 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
53649 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
53650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53654 The sizes are explained in detail in section
53655 \begin_inset space ~
53659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
53669 \begin_layout Subsection
53671 \begin_inset Index idx
53676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53678 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53694 \begin_inset Index idx
53699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53718 \begin_layout Standard
53719 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
53720 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
53727 \begin_layout Standard
53728 By checking the option
53732 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
53740 \begin_inset space ~
53744 \begin_inset space ~
53749 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
53752 \begin_layout Subsection
53754 \begin_inset Index idx
53759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53761 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53778 \begin_layout Standard
53779 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
53783 \begin_layout Standard
53788 enables previewing snippets of your document.
53789 This feature is described in section
53790 \begin_inset space ~
53794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53796 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
53804 \begin_layout Standard
53805 Checking the option
53808 \begin_inset space ~
53812 \begin_inset space ~
53816 \begin_inset space ~
53821 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
53824 \begin_layout Section
53826 \begin_inset Index idx
53831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53850 \begin_layout Subsection
53854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53858 \begin_layout Standard
53861 Cursor follows scrollbar
53863 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
53866 \begin_layout Standard
53867 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
53868 If you set the value to zero,
53869 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
53872 \begin_layout Standard
53875 Scroll below end of document
53877 is self-explanatory.
53880 \begin_layout Standard
53881 In \SpecialChar LyX
53882 one can jump from word to word by pressing
53889 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
53891 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
53892 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
53895 \begin_layout Standard
53898 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
53900 is only relevant in documents that
53906 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
53914 markup) with this option selected.
53915 It the option is not selected,
53916 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
53917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53922 \begin_inset Quotes els
53926 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53930 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
53931 dissolving from insets.
53942 \begin_inset Quotes els
53946 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53949 notwithstanding the state of this option.
53952 \begin_layout Standard
53955 Sort environments alphabetically
53957 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53960 \begin_layout Standard
53963 Group environments by their category
53965 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53968 \begin_layout Standard
53973 options determine the editing style for math macros,
53985 \begin_layout Standard
53988 Search drive for cited files
53990 allows \SpecialChar LyX
53991 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
53994 \begin_inset space ~
53998 \begin_inset space ~
54002 \begin_inset space ~
54006 \begin_inset space ~
54009 Content\SpecialChar ldots
54012 context menu on a citation.
54017 field determines the search pattern.
54019 \begin_inset space ~
54023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54025 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
54033 \begin_layout Subsection
54035 \begin_inset Index idx
54040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54047 \begin_inset Index idx
54052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54054 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54071 \begin_layout Standard
54076 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
54078 Several binding files are available,
54082 \begin_layout Description
54083 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
54086 \begin_layout Description
54087 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
54098 \begin_layout Description
54099 mac.bind a set of bindings for
54102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54110 \begin_layout Standard
54111 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
54117 and binding files for special languages.
54118 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
54120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54124 \begin_inset space \space{}
54128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54136 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
54137 in a certain language,
54139 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
54142 \begin_layout Standard
54143 Some binding files,
54149 only have a limited scope.
54150 When looking at the end of the file
54155 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
54158 \begin_layout Standard
54162 \begin_inset space ~
54166 \begin_inset space ~
54171 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
54174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54178 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
54183 \begin_inset Index idx
54188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54190 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54207 \begin_layout Standard
54208 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
54209 functions and the bound shortcuts.
54210 To find functions easily,
54211 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
54213 Show key-bindings containing
54216 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
54217 Insert there for example as keyword
54218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54225 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
54226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54235 one function can have more than one shortcut.
54236 All \SpecialChar LyX
54237 functions are also listed in the file
54242 that you will find in the
54249 \begin_layout Standard
54251 to add the shortcut
54260 select the function and press the
54265 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
54266 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
54269 \begin_layout Standard
54270 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
54271 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
54272 Function definition with “
54274 command-alternatives
54276 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
54278 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
54281 \begin_layout Standard
54282 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
54286 \begin_layout Standard
54287 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
54288 The syntax of the entries is:
54291 \begin_layout Standard
54297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54316 \begin_layout Standard
54319 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
54320 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
54321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54354 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
54355 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
54356 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
54357 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
54362 you needed to specify it as
54367 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
54368 you don't have to care for these specifics.
54370 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
54373 \begin_layout Subsection
54375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54377 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
54382 \begin_inset Index idx
54387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54394 \begin_inset Index idx
54399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54418 \begin_layout Standard
54419 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
54420 For the case where this is not possible,
54422 provides keyboard maps.
54425 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
54429 \begin_inset space ~
54433 \begin_inset space ~
54438 and select the keyboard map file named
54445 \begin_layout Standard
54460 you can select the first and second with
54463 arg "keymap-primary"
54469 arg "keymap-secondary"
54472 respectively or toggle between them with
54475 arg "keymap-toggle"
54481 \begin_layout Standard
54482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54491 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
54499 \begin_layout Standard
54500 You can also specify the mouse
54502 Wheel scrolling speed
54505 The standard value is 1.0;
54506 higher values speed up the scrolling,
54507 lower ones slow it down.
54510 Middle mouse button pasting
54512 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
54515 \begin_layout Standard
54523 \begin_inset space ~
54527 \begin_inset space ~
54533 you can select a key for zooming.
54534 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
54535 the text is zoomed.
54538 \begin_layout Subsection
54542 \begin_layout Standard
54543 Input completion is described in section
54544 \begin_inset space ~
54548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54550 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
54558 \begin_layout Section
54560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54567 \begin_inset Index idx
54572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54579 \begin_inset Index idx
54584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54603 \begin_layout Standard
54604 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
54605 are normally determined during the installation.
54606 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
54609 \begin_layout Description
54611 \begin_inset space ~
54614 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
54615 's working directory.
54616 It is the default when you
54628 \begin_inset space ~
54636 \begin_layout Description
54638 \begin_inset space ~
54641 templates This directory contains the templates that are shown in
54643 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54645 \begin_inset space ~
54649 \begin_inset space ~
54657 \begin_layout Description
54659 \begin_inset space ~
54662 files This directory contains the example files that are listed in
54664 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54670 \begin_layout Description
54672 \begin_inset space ~
54676 \begin_inset Index idx
54681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54697 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
54698 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
54699 \begin_inset space ~
54703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54705 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54715 will be used to save the backups.
54716 \begin_inset Newline newline
54719 Backup files have the ending
54720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54730 \begin_layout Description
54732 \begin_inset space ~
54735 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
54736 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
54738 \begin_inset Newline newline
54746 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54752 You can edit this file with the program
54761 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
54762 in its preferences under
54765 \begin_inset space ~
54771 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
54776 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
54778 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
54785 and \SpecialChar LyX
54786 need to be running the same time.
54787 \begin_inset Newline newline
54790 The pipe is also used for the
54796 \begin_inset space ~
54800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54802 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54808 \begin_inset Newline newline
54811 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
54812 Server-Pipe on Windows,
54813 you must use this pipe name:
54814 \begin_inset Newline newline
54830 \begin_layout Description
54832 \begin_inset space ~
54835 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
54838 \begin_layout Description
54840 \begin_inset space ~
54843 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
54844 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54847 \begin_layout Description
54849 \begin_inset space ~
54852 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
54857 You only need to specify it if you are using
54861 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54862 For \SpecialChar LyX
54867 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
54870 \begin_layout Description
54872 \begin_inset space ~
54875 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
54876 When \SpecialChar LyX
54877 needs to use an external program,
54878 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
54879 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
54881 so you normally don't have to modify it.
54883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54891 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
54894 \begin_layout Description
54896 \begin_inset space ~
54899 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
54900 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
54901 code or in the document preamble.
54902 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
54903 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
54904 If files are included,
54905 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
54906 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
54908 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
54909 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
54912 \begin_layout Section
54916 \begin_layout Standard
54917 Here you can insert your
54926 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
54927 as described in section
54928 \begin_inset space ~
54932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54934 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54940 to mark changes you make as yours.
54943 \begin_layout Section
54945 \begin_inset Index idx
54950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54967 \begin_inset Index idx
54972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54991 \begin_layout Subsection
54993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54995 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55002 \begin_layout Description
55004 \begin_inset space ~
55008 \begin_inset space ~
55011 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
55013 You can find its actual translation status here:
55015 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55017 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
55025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55026 LaTeX Language Support
55029 \begin_layout Description
55031 \begin_inset space ~
55034 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
55035 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
55036 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
55037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55053 The most widespread language package is
55058 \begin_inset Index idx
55063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55081 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
55083 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55084 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55085 come with the alternative language package
55090 \begin_inset Index idx
55095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55098 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55112 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
55114 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
55119 The available selections are described in section
55120 \begin_inset space ~
55124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55126 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
55134 \begin_layout Description
55136 \begin_inset space ~
55139 start Here you customize the command that is used to switch to a different language.
55140 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
55144 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
55145 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
55148 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
55152 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
55160 which needs the start command
55175 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55182 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55189 this setting is ignored.
55192 \begin_layout Description
55194 \begin_inset space ~
55197 end Use this if the language switch set in
55201 needs to be explicitly ended,
55206 's alternative command
55210 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
55211 \SpecialChar allowbreak
55214 end{otherlanguage*}
55222 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55224 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
55228 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55236 this setting is ignored.
55239 \begin_layout Description
55241 \begin_inset space ~
55245 \begin_inset space ~
55248 globally If this option is set,
55249 the languages used in the document will be added to the document class options rather than the language package options.
55250 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
55252 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way.
55255 \begin_layout Description
55257 \begin_inset space ~
55261 \begin_inset space ~
55265 \begin_inset space ~
55268 explicitly If this option is set,
55269 the language switch defined in
55272 \begin_inset space ~
55277 is output at the beginning of the document,
55278 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
55279 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
55280 This might be needed if you use a non-default
55283 \begin_inset space ~
55288 or if a package resets the document language.
55290 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
55293 \begin_layout Description
55295 \begin_inset space ~
55299 \begin_inset space ~
55303 \begin_inset space ~
55306 explicitly Counterpart to
55308 Set document language explicitly
55315 \begin_inset space ~
55320 is output at the end of the document.
55323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55324 \paragraph_spacing single
55328 \begin_layout Description
55330 \begin_inset space ~
55334 \begin_inset space ~
55338 all text in a language different to the document language will be marked (by default with a blue underline).
55341 \begin_layout Description
55343 \begin_inset space ~
55347 \begin_inset space ~
55350 movement Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves when writing scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
55357 \begin_layout Standard
55362 means that the cursor follows the logic of the text direction,
55363 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
55365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55369 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
55370 Hebrew embedded in English),
55371 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
55376 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
55377 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
55378 right arrow in this specific case always means:
55383 in text (even if this means:
55389 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
55390 since the cursor then follows a coherent
55391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55401 \begin_layout Standard
55407 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
55409 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
55410 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
55415 ) when coming from the left.
55416 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
55417 at the expense of the text logic.
55421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55425 \begin_layout Description
55427 \begin_inset space ~
55431 \begin_inset space ~
55434 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
55436 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
55437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55443 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
55446 \begin_layout Description
55448 \begin_inset space ~
55452 \begin_inset space ~
55455 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
55459 \begin_layout Subsection
55463 \begin_layout Standard
55464 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
55465 \begin_inset space ~
55469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55471 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
55479 \begin_layout Section
55483 \begin_layout Subsection
55485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55487 name "subsec:General-output"
55494 \begin_layout Description
55496 \begin_inset space ~
55499 search Commands that will be used for the menu
55501 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55503 \begin_inset space ~
55509 For a detailed description see section
55511 Reverse DVI/PDF search
55516 \begin_inset space ~
55524 \begin_layout Description
55526 \begin_inset space ~
55529 Options Options for the program
55533 that is used for the export format
55539 \begin_inset space ~
55543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55545 reference "subsec:Export"
55551 Possible options are listed in the
55556 \begin_inset Newline newline
55560 \begin_inset Flex URL
55563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55565 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
55575 \begin_layout Description
55577 \begin_inset space ~
55581 \begin_inset space ~
55584 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
55586 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55587 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
55589 \begin_inset space ~
55595 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
55598 \begin_layout Description
55600 \begin_inset space ~
55604 \begin_inset space ~
55607 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
55608 is allowed to overwrite on export.
55611 \begin_layout Subsection
55617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55619 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
55624 \begin_inset Index idx
55629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55631 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55649 \begin_layout Description
55651 \begin_inset space ~
55655 \begin_inset space ~
55659 \begin_inset space ~
55663 \begin_inset space ~
55666 options They only have an effect when the program
55670 is used as DVI-viewer,
55671 read its manual to find out more.
55674 \begin_layout Standard
55675 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
55676 But before you change something,
55677 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
55680 \begin_layout Description
55682 \begin_inset space ~
55685 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
55687 \begin_inset space ~
55691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55693 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
55701 \begin_layout Description
55703 \begin_inset space ~
55706 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
55708 \begin_inset space ~
55712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55714 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
55722 \begin_layout Description
55724 \begin_inset space ~
55727 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
55729 \begin_inset space ~
55733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55735 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
55743 \begin_layout Description
55749 \begin_inset space ~
55752 command Command for the program
55754 Check\SpecialChar TeX
55757 that is described in the section
55759 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
55764 Additional Features
55769 \begin_layout Standard
55770 There are additionally the following options:
55773 \begin_layout Description
55775 \begin_inset space ~
55779 \begin_inset space ~
55783 \begin_inset space ~
55787 \begin_inset space ~
55792 \begin_inset space ~
55795 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
55797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55814 to separate folders.
55815 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
55817 \begin_inset Index idx
55822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55829 \begin_inset Index idx
55834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55853 \begin_layout Description
55855 \begin_inset space ~
55859 \begin_inset space ~
55863 \begin_inset space ~
55867 \begin_inset space ~
55871 \begin_inset space ~
55875 \begin_inset space ~
55878 changes Removes all manually set
55884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55887 \begin_inset space ~
55892 dialog when changing the document class.
55895 \begin_layout Section
55897 \begin_inset space ~
55901 \begin_inset Index idx
55906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55915 \begin_layout Subsection
55917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55919 name "subsec:Converters"
55924 \begin_inset Index idx
55929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55938 \begin_layout Standard
55939 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
55940 You can modify converters or create new ones.
55941 To modify a converter,
55943 change the entry of the
55950 \begin_inset space ~
55955 field and press the
55960 To create a new converter,
55961 select an existing one,
55962 select a different format in the
55965 \begin_inset space ~
55975 field and press the
55982 \begin_layout Standard
55985 Converter File Cache
55992 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
55994 Maximum Age (in days
55997 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
55998 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
56001 \begin_layout Standard
56002 More about converters,
56003 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
56004 is described in the section
56015 \begin_layout Subsection
56017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56019 name "sec:File-Formats"
56024 \begin_inset Index idx
56029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56036 \begin_inset Index idx
56041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56050 \begin_layout Standard
56051 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
56061 programs that should be used for certain formats.
56064 \begin_layout Standard
56065 You can also define the
56067 Default output format
56069 that is used when you use
56073 View Master Document
56077 Update Master Document
56083 menu or the toolbar.
56086 \begin_layout Standard
56087 More about formats and their options is described in the section
56098 \begin_layout Standard
56099 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
56100 's temporary directory,
56101 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
56102 This is done by specifying a
56107 More about this is described in the section
56118 \begin_layout Chapter
56119 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56121 \begin_inset Index idx
56126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56135 name "chap:Units-available-in"
56142 \begin_layout Standard
56144 \begin_inset space ~
56148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56150 reference "tab:Units"
56155 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56156 and used in this documentation.
56159 \begin_layout Standard
56160 \begin_inset Float table
56167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56168 \begin_inset Caption Standard
56170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56186 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
56192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56194 \begin_inset Tabular
56195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
56196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
56197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56198 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
56199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56352 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
56356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56623 scaled point (65536
56624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56691 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
56696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56815 % of original image width
56820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56904 \begin_layout Standard
56905 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56908 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
56915 \begin_layout Bibliography
56916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56917 LatexCommand bibitem
56924 The \SpecialChar LyX
56927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56930 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
56936 \begin_inset Newline newline
56940 \begin_inset Flex URL
56943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56945 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
56953 \begin_layout Bibliography
56954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56955 LatexCommand bibitem
56956 key "latexcompanion"
56961 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
56964 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
56965 Companion Second Edition.
56972 \begin_layout Bibliography
56973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56974 LatexCommand bibitem
56980 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
56984 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
56992 \begin_layout Bibliography
56993 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56994 LatexCommand bibitem
57005 A Document Preparation System.
57013 \begin_layout Bibliography
57014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57015 LatexCommand bibitem
57025 The \SpecialChar TeX
57033 \begin_layout Bibliography
57034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57035 LatexCommand bibitem
57041 The \SpecialChar TeX
57043 \begin_inset Newline newline
57047 \begin_inset Flex URL
57050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57052 https://ctan.org/topic
57060 \begin_layout Bibliography
57061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57062 LatexCommand bibitem
57068 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
57070 \begin_inset Newline newline
57074 \begin_inset Flex URL
57077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57079 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
57087 \begin_layout Bibliography
57088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57089 LatexCommand bibitem
57096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57098 name "Documentation"
57099 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
57106 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57110 \begin_inset Newline newline
57114 \begin_inset Flex URL
57117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57119 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
57127 \begin_layout Bibliography
57128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57129 LatexCommand bibitem
57136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57138 name "Documentation"
57139 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
57144 how to use the program
57146 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57150 \begin_inset Newline newline
57154 \begin_inset Flex URL
57157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57159 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
57167 \begin_layout Bibliography
57168 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57169 LatexCommand bibitem
57176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57178 name "Documentation"
57179 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
57184 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57190 \begin_inset Index idx
57195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57198 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57213 \begin_inset Newline newline
57217 \begin_inset Flex URL
57220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57222 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
57230 \begin_layout Bibliography
57231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57232 LatexCommand bibitem
57239 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57241 name "Documentation"
57242 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
57247 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57253 \begin_inset Index idx
57258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57261 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57276 \begin_inset Newline newline
57280 \begin_inset Flex URL
57283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57285 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
57293 \begin_layout Bibliography
57294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57295 LatexCommand bibitem
57302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57304 name "Documentation"
57305 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
57315 \begin_inset Newline newline
57319 \begin_inset Flex URL
57322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57324 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
57332 \begin_layout Bibliography
57333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57334 LatexCommand bibitem
57335 key "makeindex-man"
57341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57344 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
57354 \begin_inset Newline newline
57358 \begin_inset Flex URL
57361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57363 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
57371 \begin_layout Bibliography
57372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57373 LatexCommand bibitem
57380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57382 name "Documentation"
57383 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
57393 \begin_inset Newline newline
57397 \begin_inset Flex URL
57400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57402 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
57410 \begin_layout Bibliography
57411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57412 LatexCommand bibitem
57419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57421 name "Documentation"
57422 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
57432 \begin_inset Newline newline
57436 \begin_inset Flex URL
57439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57441 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
57449 \begin_layout Bibliography
57450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57451 LatexCommand bibitem
57458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57460 name "Documentation"
57461 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
57466 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
57468 \begin_inset Newline newline
57472 \begin_inset Flex URL
57475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57477 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
57485 \begin_layout Bibliography
57486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57487 LatexCommand bibitem
57494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57496 name "Documentation"
57497 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
57502 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57508 \begin_inset Index idx
57513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57516 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57531 \begin_inset Newline newline
57535 \begin_inset Flex URL
57538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57540 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
57548 \begin_layout Bibliography
57549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57550 LatexCommand bibitem
57557 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57559 name "Documentation"
57560 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
57565 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57571 \begin_inset Index idx
57576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57594 \begin_inset Newline newline
57598 \begin_inset Flex URL
57601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57603 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
57611 \begin_layout Bibliography
57612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57613 LatexCommand bibitem
57620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57622 name "Documentation"
57623 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
57628 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57634 \begin_inset Index idx
57639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57657 \begin_inset Newline newline
57661 \begin_inset Flex URL
57664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57666 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
57674 \begin_layout Bibliography
57675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57676 LatexCommand bibitem
57683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57685 name "Documentation"
57686 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
57691 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57697 \begin_inset Index idx
57702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57720 \begin_inset Newline newline
57724 \begin_inset Flex URL
57727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57729 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
57737 \begin_layout Bibliography
57738 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57739 LatexCommand bibitem
57746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57748 name "Documentation"
57749 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
57754 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57760 \begin_inset Index idx
57765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57768 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57783 \begin_inset Newline newline
57787 \begin_inset Flex URL
57790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57792 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
57800 \begin_layout Bibliography
57801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57802 LatexCommand bibitem
57809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57811 name "Documentation"
57812 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
57817 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57823 \begin_inset Index idx
57828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57846 \begin_inset Newline newline
57850 \begin_inset Flex URL
57853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57855 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
57863 \begin_layout Bibliography
57864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57865 LatexCommand bibitem
57872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57874 name "Documentation"
57875 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
57880 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57886 \begin_inset Index idx
57891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57909 \begin_inset Newline newline
57913 \begin_inset Flex URL
57916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57918 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
57926 \begin_layout Bibliography
57927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57928 LatexCommand bibitem
57935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57937 name "Documentation"
57938 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
57943 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57949 \begin_inset Index idx
57954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57957 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57972 \begin_inset Newline newline
57976 \begin_inset Flex URL
57979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57981 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
57989 \begin_layout Bibliography
57990 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57991 LatexCommand bibitem
57998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58001 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
58006 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58008 \begin_inset Newline newline
58012 \begin_inset Flex URL
58015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58017 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
58025 \begin_layout Bibliography
58026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58027 LatexCommand bibitem
58034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58037 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
58042 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58044 \begin_inset Newline newline
58048 \begin_inset Flex URL
58051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58053 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
58061 \begin_layout Bibliography
58062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58063 LatexCommand bibitem
58070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58073 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
58078 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58079 for Cyrillic languages:
58080 \begin_inset Newline newline
58084 \begin_inset Flex URL
58087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58089 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
58097 \begin_layout Bibliography
58098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58099 LatexCommand bibitem
58106 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58109 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
58114 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58116 \begin_inset Newline newline
58120 \begin_inset Flex URL
58123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58125 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
58133 \begin_layout Bibliography
58134 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58135 LatexCommand bibitem
58142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58145 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
58150 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58152 \begin_inset Newline newline
58156 \begin_inset Flex URL
58159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58161 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
58169 \begin_layout Bibliography
58170 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58171 LatexCommand bibitem
58178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58181 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
58186 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58188 \begin_inset Newline newline
58192 \begin_inset Flex URL
58195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58197 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
58205 \begin_layout Standard
58206 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
58213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58241 \begin_inset Note Note
58244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58251 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
58252 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
58260 \begin_layout Standard
58261 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
58262 LatexCommand bibtex
58263 btprint "btPrintCited"
58264 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
58273 \begin_layout Standard
58274 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58278 \begin_layout Standard
58282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58288 pagedeclaration}[1]{
58291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58298 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
58306 \begin_inset Note Note
58309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58310 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
58312 \begin_inset space ~
58316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58318 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
58331 \begin_layout Standard
58332 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
58333 LatexCommand printnomenclature
58339 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
58340 LatexCommand printindex